*** empty log message ***
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d1e68bce 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-09-17
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
29support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 30
1fa28578
GM
31\f
32* Changes in Emacs 21.1
33
068127d6
GM
34** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
35operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
36
fd06c7da
MB
37** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
38(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
39remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
40may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
41
62c273d7
DL
42** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
43is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
44
45+++
46** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
47mode `iswitchb-mode'.
48
f393cf90
DL
49** Gnus changes.
50
51The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
52four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
53internationalization and mail-fetching.
54
55*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
56many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
57
58If you used procmail like in
59
60(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
61(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
62(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
63(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
64
327652be 65this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
66
67(setq mail-sources
68 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
69 :suffix ".in")))
70
71More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
72Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
73
74*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
75Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
76
77*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too
78many parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables.
79
80*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
81called to position point.
82
83*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
84summary buffers and NOV files.
85
86*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
87of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
88
89*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
90subtly different manner.
91
92*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
93and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
94ever-changing layouts.
95
96*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
97
98*** There is image support.
99
100** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1018859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
102more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
103empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
104window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
105on.
106
ba9eeda1
GM
107** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
108set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
109file that is already visited under a different name.
110
42ac0ae5
GM
111** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
112nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
113
114** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
115recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
116signaled.
117
ba9eeda1 118** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
119support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
120use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
121buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
122M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
123new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
124
b941a14b 125+++
ba9eeda1 126** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
b941a14b
KH
127and displayes information about that.
128
ba9eeda1 129** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
130file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
131
d7b38c05 132** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 133added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
134Postscript files are included.
135
136** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
137`dired-ref.tex'.
138
25ad1371
GM
139** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
140expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
141
142This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
143determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
144mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
145interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
146regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
147associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
148
424d8b44 149+++
f0298744
DL
150** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
151displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
152menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
153menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
154
9a8d84ca
DL
155** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
156a version-dependent component.
157
d76c03ea
GM
158** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
159Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
160will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
161character is still bound as before.
162
3b4fa1b2
DL
163** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
164using that menu.
165
40e857ea 166** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 167suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 168
beb2eb00 169+++
c08398de
DL
170** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
171buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
172contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
173by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
174insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
175the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
176Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
177
db7a3ede 178+++
3d6cd763
GM
179** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
180coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
181escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
182such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
183recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 184always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 185read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
186(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
187RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 188
0b8a3a6d
DL
189** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
190environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
191
424d8b44 192+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
193** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
194point in a pop-up window.
195
6d35b49f 196+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
197** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
198displays all characters in that character set.
199
200** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
201coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
202
a4067978 203+++
5cb6a58e 204** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
205on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
206defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 207
424d8b44 208+++
a1b8d58b
GM
209** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
210
6e417ca5
DL
211** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
212been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
213
424d8b44 214+++
5898e075
DL
215** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
216`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
217indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
218indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
219
424d8b44 220+++
abfcc168
GM
221** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
222sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 223(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
224You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
225
424d8b44 226+++
cc181e95
GM
227** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
228on the display using several methods
229
424d8b44 230+++
cc181e95
GM
231- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
232a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
233be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
234
424d8b44 235+++
cc181e95
GM
236- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
237equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
238
da4496b6 239- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
240
241- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
242the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
243
424d8b44 244+++
3b4fa1b2 245** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 246an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 247command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 248does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 249
424d8b44 250+++
176256a1 251** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
252`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
253typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 254
dd0add8e
DL
255** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
256characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
257
bf3ba9ac 258+++
699238d9
GM
259** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
260compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
261this behavior.
262
263The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
264compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
265Emacs dump core.
266
424d8b44 267+++
699238d9 268** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 269
7233c5bd
GM
270*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
271whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
272is useful for debugging X problems.
273
274Example:
275
699238d9 276 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 277
100b3cbb
GM
278*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
279visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
280the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
281and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
282visual class names are
283
284 TrueColor
285 PseudoColor
286 DirectColor
287 StaticColor
288 GrayScale
289 StaticGray
290
291Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
292`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
293meaning.
294
295The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
296supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
297`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
298visual.
299
300Example:
301
699238d9 302 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
303
304*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
305specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
306default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
307resource values are `true' or `on'.
308
309Example:
310
699238d9 311 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 312
0d0c76b8
EZ
313** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
314more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
315now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
316
42088c12 317** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 318display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
319shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
320be customized.
c60ea02e 321
424d8b44 322+++
31047e0d
DL
323** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
324
424d8b44 325+++
b02786f9
GM
326** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
327all frames except the selected one.
328
3261c1d8
DL
329** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
330to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
331
ffe36136 332** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
333the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
334MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
335displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
336
0292b49f 337+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
338** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
339MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 340
559cee90
DL
341** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
342read mail from the menu etc.
343
480b5773 344+++
271b4185
GM
345** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
346a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
347
0daee095
GM
348** Changes in Texinfo mode.
349
350** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
351macros
352
353 Key binding Macro
354 -------------------------
355 C-c C-c C-s @strong
356 C-c C-c C-e @emph
357 C-c C-c u @url
358 C-c C-c q @quotation
359 C-c C-c m @email
360
559cee90
DL
361** Changes in Outline mode.
362
363There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
364`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
365the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
366
327652be 367** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 368
c0a8c108
EZ
369+++
370*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
371with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
372are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
373Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
374buffers to kill, as before.
375
376Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 377i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
378this way.
379
956777b3
GM
380** Changes to Show Paren mode.
381
382*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
383The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
384use. Default is 1000.
385
f6989277 386+++
404fa7d6
DL
387** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
388groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
389
424d8b44
DL
390+++
391** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
392M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
393M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
394buffers.
8964fec7 395
424d8b44 396+++
39783d73
WP
397** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
398under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
399.emacs file.
400
401The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
402determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
403
d35fce81
GM
404** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
405abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
406`directory-abbrev-alist'.
407
a933dad1
DL
408** Faces and frame parameters.
409
410There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
411Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
412`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
413`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
414sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
415for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
416parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
417
418Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
419`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 420`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
421`default' face and vice versa.
422
d80061fa 423+++
f77a4a8a
GM
424** New face `menu'.
425
426The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
427Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
428attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
429
424d8b44 430+++
a933dad1
DL
431** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
432
433The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
434colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
435correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
436the screen gamma of a frame's display.
437
438PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
439in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
440color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
441
442The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
443`ScreenGamma'.
444
445** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
446
447The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
448Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
449oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
450of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
451the text.
452
453** Emacs has a new face implementation.
454
455The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
456font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
457height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
458These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
459specify a font.
460
461Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
462These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
463under Lisp changes, below.
464
465** New default font is Courier 12pt.
466
424d8b44
DL
467+++
468** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
469of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
470otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
471
472** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
473truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
474foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
475customizing face `fringe'.
476
477** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
478can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
479
480** LessTif support.
481
424d8b44
DL
482Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
483You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
484
485** Toolkit scroll bars.
486
487Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
488LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
489configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
490bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
491bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
492Emacs.
493
494When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
495Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
496Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
497Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
498define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
499`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
500
501Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
502a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
503directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
504different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
505system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
506add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
507
508The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
509`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
510This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
511image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
512Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
513
514** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
515
516When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
517widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
518Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
519
424d8b44 520+++
a933dad1
DL
521** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
522
523When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
524whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
525defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
526highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
527displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
528whitespace.
529
6e612d4d 530+++
a933dad1
DL
531** Busy-cursor.
532
533Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
534display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
535
424d8b44 536+++
a933dad1
DL
537** Blinking cursor
538
539M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
540terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
541and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
542the group `cursor'.
543
544** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
545
546This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
547generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
548See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
549details.
550
551Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
552have to do anything to activate it.
553
554** Tabs and variable-width text.
555
556Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
557defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
558independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
559Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
560
561** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
562
424d8b44 563+++
a933dad1
DL
564*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
565
566 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
567
79dd1637
RS
568The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
569LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 570
79dd1637
RS
571*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
572LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 573
34d90e29 574+++
a933dad1
DL
575** Hscrolling in C code.
576
cc181e95
GM
577Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
578`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
579customized.
a933dad1
DL
580
581** Tool bar support.
582
583Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
584how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
d1e68bce
DL
585Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is displayed.
586To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
587for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
a933dad1 588
424d8b44 589+++
a933dad1
DL
590** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
591
592Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
593mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
594line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
595about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
596in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
597
598Currently, the following actions have been defined:
599
600- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
601buffers.
602
603- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
604M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
605
606- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
607
424d8b44
DL
608- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
609`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
610
611- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
612
613** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
614
615When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 616from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
617non-nil.
618
619** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
620
621Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
622Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
623the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
624italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
625Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
626attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
627on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
628
629** Sound support
630
2f516940 631Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 632driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 633supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 634
424d8b44 635+++
a933dad1
DL
636** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
637the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
638forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
639value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
640users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
641even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
642
643The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
644
0e18b431 645+++
a933dad1
DL
646** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
647
648As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
649drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
650`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
651
fdd8bb68 652+++
a933dad1
DL
653** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
654bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
655
656This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
657`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
658variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
659
c5d00c64 660+++
a933dad1
DL
661** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
662
663When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
664value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
665number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 666fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
667
668When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
669value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
670number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 671fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
672
673** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
674notably at the end of lines.
675
676All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
677spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
678
424d8b44 679+++
eee54b0e
DL
680There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
681
a933dad1
DL
682** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
683query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
684after each match to get the replacement text.
685
00782214 686+++
d5483ab1
GM
687** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
688you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 689
424d8b44 690** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
691you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
692lisp-complete-symbol.
693
7af69644 694+++
a933dad1
DL
695** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
696
163ea954
RS
697If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
698longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
699it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
700window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
701
702- User option: max-mini-window-height
703
704Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
705fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
706specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
707
708Default is 0.25.
709
2f72fd2f
GM
710** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
711
0d43b60d
GM
712** Changes to hideshow.el
713
714Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
715selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
716conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
717
718*** Generalized block selection and traversal
719
720A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
721(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
722which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
723`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
724point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
725(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
726
727If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
728i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
729backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
730the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
731
732*** Isearch support for updating mode line
733
734During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
735blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
736line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
737portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
738is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
739
740To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
741something like this in your .emacs.
742
743 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
744 (lambda ()
745 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
746
327652be
TTN
747*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
748
749Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
750header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
751`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
752moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
753block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
754behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
755useful.
756
757You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
758function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
759of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
760code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
761appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
762
763(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
764 (hs-hide-level 1)
765 (forward-sexp 1))
766(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
767
768The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
769emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
770only for code blocks.
771
772*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
773
774Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
775parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
776display for implementation.
777
778*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
779
780The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
781LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
782which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
783new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
784
785 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
786 hs-show-block C-c C-s
787 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
788 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
789 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
790 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
791 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
792
793These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
794
559cee90
DL
795** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
796
424d8b44 797+++
1b24b888
GM
798*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
799an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
800log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
801
424d8b44 802+++
1b24b888
GM
803**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
804current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
805
806+++
1b24b888
GM
807*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
808in a log file.
eb2aac9d 809
502004be 810+++
1b24b888
GM
811*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
812entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 813
502004be 814+++
1b24b888 815*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
816version number is performed based on regular expressions from
817`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
818Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 819
1b24b888
GM
820*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock
821highlighting.
822
3476b54a
GM
823** Changes in Font Lock
824
825*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
826font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
827mode.
828
b3b98592
GM
829** Comint (subshell) changes
830
66b6c480
MB
831By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
832distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
833the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
834attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
835Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
836boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
837To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
838`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
839
b3b98592
GM
840Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
841and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
842
843The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
844buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
845buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
846
847The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
848M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
849the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
850
8c1bec7c
MB
851Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
852now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
853previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
854user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 855
e26cec67
GM
856** Changes to Rmail mode
857
c0510d27
GM
858*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
859set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
860receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
861recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
862`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
863as correspondent.
864
865Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
866mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 867regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 868
3b55acc9
GM
869*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
870to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
871Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
872with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
873for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
874
6a1950ec
GM
875*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
876like `j'.
877
5bb6f079
RS
878*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
879specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 880digest message.
e26cec67 881
993d8b7d
DL
882*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
883in which folder to put messages automatically.
884
400a1ed0
GM
885** Changes to TeX mode
886
887The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
888`latex-mode'.
889
a933dad1
DL
890** Changes to RefTeX mode
891
892*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
893 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
894 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
895 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
896 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
897 can be edited from that buffer.
898
899*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
900 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
901 `A' to use all marked entries).
902
903*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
904 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
905
906*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
907 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
908 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
909 been cited.
910
38de9631
GM
911** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
912The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
913semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
914in column 1 are always made leaves.
915
a933dad1
DL
916** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
917has the following new features:
918
919*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
920may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
921to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
922time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
923
924*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
925feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
926file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
927compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
928pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
929defaults to 1.
930
5d94f558 931** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
932file names.
933
424d8b44 934+++
a933dad1
DL
935** Tooltips.
936
937Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
938mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
939can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
940
941Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
942variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
943the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
944tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
945
424d8b44 946+++
a933dad1
DL
947** Customize changes
948
949*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
950`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
951cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
952
953*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
954Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
955default).
956
0ae51efb
GM
957*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
958between custom options. Example:
959
960 (defcustom default-input-method nil
961 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
962 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
963 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
964 :group 'mule
965 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
966 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
967
968This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
969current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
970first in a custom-set-variables statement.
971
a933dad1
DL
972** New features in evaluation commands
973
5e03eb84 974*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
975modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
976print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
977customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
978eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
979
5e03eb84
GM
980*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
981code when called with a prefix argument.
982
ead53494
GM
983** Ispell changes
984
37d8a691 985+++
bbe15990
EZ
986*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
987transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
988spell-checks the current buffer.
989
37d8a691 990+++
385ff9e3
GM
991*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
992added.
993
994*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
995correction is made and re-checked.
996
74ec6045 997*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
998
999*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1000cases.
1001
1002*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1003on syntax errors.
1004
1005*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1006end of the buffer.
1007
a933dad1
DL
1008** Dired changes
1009
1010*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1011command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1012is, delete only empty directories.
1013
1014*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1015command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1016copy directories recursively.
1017
f6737cde
GM
1018*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1019in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1020the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1021
2f72fd2f
GM
1022*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1023replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1024directory.
1025
7381ae05
MB
1026*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1027a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1028This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1029will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1030accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1031
e024b101
GM
1032*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1033from ls switches.
1034
a933dad1
DL
1035** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1036use the -f option when sending mail.
1037
b1c609b1
GM
1038** CC mode changes.
1039
1040Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1041current user setups (although it's believed that these
1042incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1043However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1044back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1045compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1046release.
1047
7972fcfc
GM
1048*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1049This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1050of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1051non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1052want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1053have to bother.
1054
1055Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1056situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1057and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1058If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1059the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1060by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1061
b1c609b1
GM
1062*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1063When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1064variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1065take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1066is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1067settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1068possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1069Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1070
1071By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1072special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1073the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1074of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1075above.
1076
1077Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1078when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1079function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1080call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1081then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1082values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1083only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1084function documentation for more info.
1085
1086The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1087especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1088with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1089intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1090such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1091is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1092configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1093global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1094
1095(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1096
1097**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1098This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1099
1100This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1101variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1102completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1103the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1104empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1105style system.
1106
1107**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1108In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1109c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1110as far as possible.
1111
1112*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1113CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1114surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1115chapter about this in the manual.
1116
1117**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1118The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1119recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1120primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1121adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1122
1123**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1124This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1125c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1126
1127**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1128This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1129
1130It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1131Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1132A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1133inside CC Mode.
1134
1135Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1136causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1137the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1138available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1139cc-mode/).
1140
1141**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1142The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1143specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1144literals.
1145
1146**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1147It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1148prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1149you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1150this function.
1151
1152*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1153It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1154to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1155struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1156Thanks to Eric Eide.
1157
1158*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1159It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1160opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1161
1162**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1163
1164*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1165See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1166better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1167and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1168
1169*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1170previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1171the column specified by comment-column.
1172
1173*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1174In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1175is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1176prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1177contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1178don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1179
1180*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1181instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1182arguments.
1183
1184*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1185
1186*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1187c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1188c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1189variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1190Provan).
1191
1192*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1193
c407c570
GM
1194** Makefile mode changes
1195
1196*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1197
5d94f558 1198*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1199Fontlock mode is active.
1200
87be76f6
GM
1201** Isearch changes
1202
3353ef5a
GM
1203*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1204so that searches can be resumed.
1205
1206*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1207respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1208that started the search.
1209
87be76f6 1210*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1211selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1212
c8a8458a 1213+++
87be76f6
GM
1214*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1215
d35fce81 1216Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1217`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1218search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1219before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1220highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1221`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1222
1223The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1224will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1225Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1226using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1227usual snappy response.
1228
1229If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1230matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1231set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1232isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1233
21bc6203 1234+++
35384f06
GM
1235** Changes in sort.el
1236
1237The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1238as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1239new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1240numeric base.
87be76f6 1241
d7b511c4
GM
1242** Changes to Ange-ftp
1243
424d8b44 1244+++
d7b511c4 1245*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1246names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1247sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1248
d7b511c4
GM
1249*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1250ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1251
9d453139
SS
1252*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1253output ^M at the end of lines.
1254
4b9347b3
GM
1255** Shell script mode changes.
1256
1257Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1258derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1259sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1260
79214ddf
FP
1261** Etags changes.
1262
1263*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1264
aca0be23 1265*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1266possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1267{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1268This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1269a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1270
79214ddf
FP
1271*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1272declarations when given the --declarations option.
1273
1274*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1275"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1276
1277*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1278types.
1279
de370c4c 1280*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1281
1282*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1283
1284*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1285are now tagged.
1286
1287*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1288variables are tagged.
1289
1290*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1291
8dc78b52
FP
1292*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1293for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1294
c8d94f86 1295+++
f6737cde
GM
1296** Changes in etags.el
1297
3f6e4b8b
GM
1298*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1299tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1300is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1301
f6737cde
GM
1302*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1303the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1304
1305If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1306FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1307TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1308obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1309
1310TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1311
1312FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1313List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1314
1315A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1316
1317 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1318 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1319 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1320
1321*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1322of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1323
1324*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1325names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1326
424d8b44 1327+++
fbc164de
PE
1328** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1329and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1330LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1331
c3eb1f10 1332+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1333** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1334Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
13358859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1336GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
13378859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1338releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1339(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1340
424d8b44 1341+++
163ea954 1342** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1343remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1344appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1345
1346** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1347
424d8b44 1348+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1349** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1350
6ab8d72d 1351+++
f6499c03 1352** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1353containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1354expression from that list, are not checked.
1355
5d94f558
SS
1356** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1357When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1358and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1359the buffer, just like for the local files.
1360
dc28878c
GM
1361** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1362
df8a9f78 1363+++
95931eb1
GM
1364** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1365displays local abbrevs, only.
1366
54baed30
GM
1367** VC Changes
1368
1369VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1370easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1371Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1372to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1373changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1374`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1375version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1376each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1377file is registered in that backend.
1378
1379When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1380backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1381directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1382master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1383the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1384As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1385
1386The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1387still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1388RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1389vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1390where it doesn't make sense.)
1391
1392The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1393obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1394`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1395
1396*** General Changes
1397
1398The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1399checks are always done now.
1400
327652be 1401VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1402operations.
1403
1404*** Changes for CVS
1405
1406There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1407default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1408remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1409by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1410regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1411that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1412queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1413
1414If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1415repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1416If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1417commit, you can either use C-u C-x v m to perform an update on the
1418current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1419entire directory tree.
1420
1421The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1422"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1423is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1424"watched" by other developers.)
1425
1426*** Lisp Changes in VC
1427
1428VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1429add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1430library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1431then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1432a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1433provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1434of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1435you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1436`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1437
a933dad1
DL
1438** New modes and packages
1439
ff332647 1440+++
90cbf47e
GM
1441*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1442intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1443typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1444on certain projects.
1445
894ca69e 1446+++
90cbf47e 1447*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1448regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1449
d96d6bb0 1450 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1451
1452will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1453face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1454typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1455Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1456appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1457current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1458corresponding file is read.
1459
424d8b44 1460+++
d96d6bb0 1461*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1462Emacs is idle.
1463
31fc5d15
GM
1464*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1465parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1466
5cb6a58e
SM
1467*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1468package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1469be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1470
424d8b44 1471+++
578979ee
GM
1472*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1473facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1474separate Texinfo file.
1475
424d8b44
DL
1476+++
1477*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1478by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1479provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1480`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1481enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1482
424d8b44 1483+++
6abca616
EZ
1484*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1485without invoking external programs.
1486
1487The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1488and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1489`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1490is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1491Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1492
1493The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1494page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1495
719e2c6e 1496+++
5e5dff44
GM
1497*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1498authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1499
1500The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1501the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1502the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1503Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1504even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1505single step.
1506
1507On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1508matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1509probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1510contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1511
424d8b44 1512+++
f7136ee8
GM
1513*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1514unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1515actually modifying content of a buffer.
1516
bbd9b566
GM
1517*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1518PostScript.
1519
1520Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1521
1522The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1523
1524 ; comment (until end of line)
1525 A non-terminal
1526 "C" terminal
1527 ?C? special
1528 $A default non-terminal
1529 $"C" default terminal
1530 $?C? default special
1531 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1532 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1533 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1534 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1535 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1536 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1537 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1538 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1539 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1540 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1541 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1542 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1543 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1544 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1545 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1546
1547Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1548
99453a38
GM
1549*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1550align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1551determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1552example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1553equal signs of assignments.
1554
424d8b44 1555+++
559cee90
DL
1556*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1557paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1558
424d8b44 1559+++
6448a6b3
GM
1560*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1561list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1562buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1563customize the package.
1564
6344985d
GM
1565*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1566
249652b1
GM
1567*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1568replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1569is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1570and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1571not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1572which answers different needs.
1573
424d8b44 1574+++
3476b54a
GM
1575*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1576suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1577expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1578course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1579reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1580to be enabled.
1581
424d8b44 1582+++
8964fec7
SM
1583*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1584containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1585
424d8b44 1586+++
a933dad1
DL
1587*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1588
424d8b44 1589+++
a933dad1
DL
1590*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1591
1592*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1593
8901d1ac
GM
1594Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1595`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1596disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1597`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1598displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1599and background colors.
1600
a933dad1
DL
1601*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1602Pascal) language.
1603
f6499c03 1604+++
a933dad1
DL
1605*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1606the text at point.
1607
1608*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1609
424d8b44 1610+++
8d54eb69
DL
1611*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1612
a933dad1
DL
1613*** whitespace.el ???
1614
ebcfda83
GM
1615*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1616files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1617(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1618interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1619often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1620uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1621codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1622
1623*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1624
1625Here is an example of columns:
1626
1627horse apple bus
1628dog pineapple car EXTRA
1629porcupine strawberry airplane
1630
1631Doing the following settings:
1632
1633 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1634 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1635 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1636 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1637
1638
1639Selecting the lines above and typing:
1640
1641 M-x delimit-columns-region
1642
1643It results:
1644
1645[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1646[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1647[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1648
1649delim-col has the following options:
1650
1651 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1652 before all columns.
1653
1654 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1655 between each column.
1656
1657 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1658 after all columns.
1659
1660 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1661 each column.
1662
1663delim-col has the following commands:
1664
1665 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1666 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1667
424d8b44 1668+++
f507826c 1669*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1670were operated on recently.
1671
1672M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1673
31fc5d15
GM
1674M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1675recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1676
31fc5d15
GM
1677M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1678filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1679file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1680
31fc5d15
GM
1681- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1682- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1683- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1684
31fc5d15
GM
1685The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1686dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1687
8062f458
DL
1688*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1689text.
1690
424d8b44 1691+++
36e24b82 1692*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1693of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1694specific to Message mode.
1695
424d8b44 1696+++
36e24b82
DL
1697*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1698viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1699with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1700
424d8b44 1701+++
aaa659ef
DL
1702*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1703interface to access directory servers using different directory
1704protocols. It has a separate manual.
1705
eee54b0e
DL
1706*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1707for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1708
424d8b44 1709+++
612839b6
GM
1710*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1711
5d94f558 1712*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1713minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1714
399da7e3
DL
1715*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1716with the diary features.
1717
6e417ca5
DL
1718*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1719numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1720
4a27bdfb
GM
1721*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1722Fill mode.
1723
a933dad1
DL
1724** Withdrawn packages
1725
1726*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1727functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1728
3261c1d8
DL
1729*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1730
1731*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1732
1733\f
1734* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1735(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1736
47e351a3
GM
1737** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1738with the more general `:mask' property.
1739
ba9eeda1
GM
1740** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1741
a2bd77b8
GM
1742** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1743backslash.
1744
424d8b44
DL
1745+++
1746** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1747is running in batch mode. For example,
1748
1749 (message "%s" (read t))
1750
1751will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1752to standard output.
1753
1754+++
1755** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1756`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1757
ead53494
GM
1758** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1759will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1760frame or window.
1761
f6499c03 1762+++
27848c01
GM
1763** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1764were added
1765
1766- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1767
1768Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1769a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1770
1771- Function: remq ELT LIST
1772
1773Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1774comparison is done with `eq'.
1775
1776** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1777
b548072f
GM
1778** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1779has been changed.
1780
424d8b44 1781+++
07b14857
KH
1782** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1783without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1784convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1785
9662da0b
GM
1786** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1787or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1788
7fce7efb
DL
1789** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1790function was declared obsolete.
1791
5d94f558 1792** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1793retained as an alias).
1794
f98d3086
SM
1795** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1796It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1797is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1798
87efd256
GM
1799** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1800
1801- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1802
1803Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1804MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1805
67c9a1d2
GM
1806** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1807
1808- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1809
1810Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1811
1812This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1813calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1814argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1815value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1816returned.
1817
1818Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1819if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1820it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1821minibuffer even if it is active.
1822
1823Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1824counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1825too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1826and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1827`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1828entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1829
1830ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1831ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1832ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1833ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1834ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1835If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1836Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1837
ead53494
GM
1838** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1839event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1840argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1841
25fa6deb
GM
1842** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1843call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1844message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1845Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1846
5d94f558 1847** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1848meaning no limit.
1849
5d94f558 1850** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1851coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1852DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1853
80c05bd3 1854** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1855of a primitive.
1856
80c05bd3
DL
1857** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1858buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1859This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1860than replacing the local map.
1861
4bc7a543
DL
1862** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1863after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1864
1865** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1866
f6499c03 1867+++
f0298744
DL
1868** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1869promised long ago.
1870
5d94f558 1871** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1872\f
1873* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1874
1875Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1876--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1877When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1878so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1879
85c75536
MB
1880*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1881buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1882the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1883restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1884
0b8a3a6d
DL
1885*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1886`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1887when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1888multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1889
1890*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1891`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1892contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1893
1894*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1895changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1896[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1897regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1898the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1899extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1900bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1901eight-bit-graphic.
1902
1903** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1904
1905A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1906a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1907character set as previously.
1908
1909*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1910They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1911modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1912
1913CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1914characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1915range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1916case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1917
1918FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1919name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1920
1921*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1922registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1923"fontset-default".
1924
1925*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1926argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1927
1928** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1929composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1930buffers and strings.
1931
1932*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1933character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1934code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1935have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1936composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1937composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1938The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1939also been deleted.
1940
1941*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1942specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1943`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1944
1945*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1946MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1947composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1948may differ between buffer and string text.
1949
1950*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1951COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1952
1953*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1954directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1955Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1956`composition' from STRING.
1957
1958*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1959a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1960
1961*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1962obsolete.
1963
1964** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1965Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1966character set is not used.
1967
1968** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1969`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1970X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1971
1972+++
1973** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1974are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 19750xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1976
399da7e3 1977+++
f0124b4a
DL
1978** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1979that offset in the file before writing.
1980
f98d3086
SM
1981** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1982compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1983
612839b6
GM
1984** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1985`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1986from which the command was issued.
1987
1988** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1989`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1990`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1991additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1992operate on.
1993
271b4185
GM
1994** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1995to `window-buffer-height'.
1996
1997- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1998
1999Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2000The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2001lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2002
2003Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2004respectively.
2005
2006If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2007COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2008
2009The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2010obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2011on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2012
2013Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2014buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2015possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2016is currently displayed in some window.
2017
3c30cb6e
DL
2018** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2019argument function's results.
2020
62f20204
GM
2021** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2022signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2023
c0510d27 2024** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2025header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2026
2027** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2028ignores differences in case and text representation.
2029
2030** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2031cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2032as follows:
2033
2034 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2035 nil don't display a cursor
2036 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2037 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2038 others display a box cursor.
2039
9a0dd3dc
GM
2040** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2041an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2042defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2043set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2044
d7b511c4 2045** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2046specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2047the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2048text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2049
2050Example:
2051
2052 (string-to-syntax "()")
2053 => (4 . 41)
2054
1fa28578
GM
2055** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2056other than 10.
2057
2058*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2059INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2060
5d94f558 2061 #b1111
1fa28578 2062 => 15
5d94f558 2063 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2064 => -15
2065
2066*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2067
5d94f558 2068 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2069 => 438
2070
2071*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2072
5d94f558 2073 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2074 => 48815
2075
2076*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2077
5d94f558 2078 #2R-111
1fa28578 2079 => -7
5d94f558 2080 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2081 => 267
2082
3d4ff2dd 2083** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2084the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2085and isn't a string.
2086
3d4ff2dd
GM
2087** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2088a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2089value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2090not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2091
16ce590d
DL
2092+++
2093** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2094
73825616 2095** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2096for a regexp in a string.
2097
2098** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2099`mouse-position-function'.
2100
723e779c
GM
2101** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2102that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2103
d1e103b2
GM
2104** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2105Keywords are now always considered constants.
2106
31047e0d
DL
2107+++
2108** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2109returns it.
2110
7a85e4df
GM
2111** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2112returned by function `recent-keys'.
2113
02b14400
RS
2114+++
2115** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2116can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2117Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2118etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2119mode.
404fa7d6 2120
02b14400 2121+++
8964fec7
SM
2122** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2123and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2124
02b14400
RS
2125+++
2126** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2127has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2128function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2129returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2130been performed."
2131
2132When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2133and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2134hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2135then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2136
02b14400 2137+++
81da8b32
GM
2138** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2139In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2140and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2141
02b14400 2142+++
9e207b90
GM
2143** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2144with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2145specified table.
2146
2147 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2148
2149Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2150TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2151saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2152what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2153
02b14400 2154+++
d7f89643 2155** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2156Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2157
02b14400 2158+++
dde9e75a
GM
2159** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2160removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2161
02b14400 2162+++
9da30515
GM
2163** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2164instead of being optional.
2165
02b14400 2166+++
d20679eb
GM
2167** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2168modify read-only text.
2169
02b14400 2170+++
fbc164de
PE
2171** New functions and variables for locales.
2172
2173The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2174decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2175time functions like strftime. The new variables
2176`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2177locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2178
2179The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2180environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2181the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2182environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2183not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2184`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2185`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2186
02b14400 2187+++
863476d1
SM
2188** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2189To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2190modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2191start sequences.
2192
02b14400 2193+++
ef6d912c
GM
2194** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2195because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2196
02b14400 2197+++
a933dad1
DL
2198** New function `propertize'
2199
2200The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2201strings with text properties.
2202
2203- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2204
2205Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2206by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2207PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2208specified value of that property. Example:
2209
2210 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2211
2212+++
2213** push and pop macros.
2214
02b14400
RS
2215Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2216are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2217as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2218
2219(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2220(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2221 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2222
02b14400
RS
2223** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2224
6c7fd5aa
RS
2225Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2226are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2227
2228(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2229 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2230 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2231 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2232
2233(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2234 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2235 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2236 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2237
a933dad1
DL
2238+++
2239** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2240as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2241
2242[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2243[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2244[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2245[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2246[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2247 space, and DEL.
2248[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2249 and DEL.
2250[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2251 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2252 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2253[:alpha:] matches letters.
2254 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2255 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2256[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2257[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2258[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2259[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2260 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2261 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2262[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2263[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2264[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2265
2266+++
2267** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2268
2269The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2270
2271- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2272
2273The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2274are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2275
2276:test TEST
2277
2278TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2279Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2280it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2281
2282:size SIZE
2283
2284SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2285many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2286
2287:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2288
2289REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2290full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2291size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
22921.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2293old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2294
2295:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2296
2297THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2298hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2299(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2300
2301:weakness WEAK
2302
b548072f
GM
2303WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2304`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2305`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2306collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2307outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2308
2309- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2310
2311Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2312
2313- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2314
2315Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2316
2317- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2318
2319Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2320values are shared.
2321
2322- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2323
2324Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2325
2326- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2327
2328Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2329
2330- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2331
2332Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2333
2334- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2335
2336Returns the size of TABLE.
2337
d96d6bb0 2338- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2339
2340Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2341
2342- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2343
2344Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2345
2346- Function: clrhash TABLE
2347
2348Clear TABLE.
2349
2350- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2351
2352Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2353not found.
2354
79214ddf 2355- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2356
2357Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2358another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2359
2360- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2361
2362Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2363
2364- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2365
2366Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2367arguments KEY and VALUE.
2368
2369- Function: sxhash OBJ
2370
2371Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2372
2373- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2374
2375Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2376a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2377comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2378and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2379of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2380
2381TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2382
2383HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2384code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2385integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2386
2387Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2388be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2389
2390 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2391 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2392
2393 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2394 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2395
79214ddf 2396 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2397 'case-fold-string-hash))
2398
2399 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2400
2401+++
2402** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2403
2404It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2405circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2406a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2407
2408+++
2409** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2410
2411If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2412#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2413
a933dad1
DL
2414+++
2415** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2416t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2417specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2418is too short to reach that column.
2419
2420+++
2421** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2422now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2423after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2424two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2425
2426If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2427perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2428and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2429
2430+++
2431** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2432to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2433
2434+++
2435** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2436calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2437
2438+++
2439** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2440directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2441small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2442small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2443temporary-file-directory instead.
2444
2445+++
2446** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2447the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2448`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2449hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2450
2451+++
2452** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2453elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2454
2455+++
2456** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2457
2458make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2459creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2460ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2461
2462+++
2463** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2464
2465The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2466on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2467is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2468never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2469ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2470overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2471
2472If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2473that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2474to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2475The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2476
2477+++
2478** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2479
2480Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2481If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2482ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2483result string.
2484
2485Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2486string where arguments appear in the result string.
2487
2488Example:
2489
2490 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2491 (s2 "world"))
2492 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2493 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2494 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2495
2496results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2497
2498+++
2499** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2500
2501Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2502The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2503argument in it.
2504
2505 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2506 (arg "world"))
2507 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2508 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2509 (message msg arg))
2510
2511+++
2512** Sound support
2513
2514Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2515(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2516
2517Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2518(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2519to enable sound support.
2520
2521Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2522list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2523when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2524functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2525sound to play, before playing the sound.
2526
2527The following sound properties are supported:
2528
2529- `:file FILE'
2530
2531FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2532searched relative to `data-directory'.
2533
6fb40beb
GM
2534- `:data DATA'
2535
2536DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2537may be present, but not both.
2538
a933dad1
DL
2539- `:volume VOLUME'
2540
2541VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
25420..1. This property is optional.
2543
2544Other properties are ignored.
2545
2546** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2547
2548** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2549a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2550
2551** Changes to garbage collection
2552
2553*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2554of live and free strings.
2555
2556*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2557strings that have been consed so far.
2558
a933dad1 2559\f
04545643
GM
2560* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2561Lisp Manual
2562
82a452c8
GM
2563*** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
2564
9a8d84ca
DL
2565+++
2566** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2567
2568** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2569image.
2570
2571- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2572
2573Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2574
2575SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2576measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2577character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2578font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2579FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2580
ebb8f116
GM
2581** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2582has a mask bitmap.
2583
2584- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2585
2586Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2587FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2588or omitted means use the selected frame.
2589
f6499c03 2590+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2591** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2592satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2593
2594+++
2595** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2596optional.
2597
f6499c03
DL
2598+++
2599** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2600below).
04545643
GM
2601
2602\f
a933dad1
DL
2603* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2604
2605Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2606--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2607When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2608so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2609
f6d3257b
GM
2610** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2611to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2612
2613Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2614text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2615is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2616your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2617laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2618just display it black instead.
2619
2620This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2621a line like
2622
2623 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2624
2625in your `.emacs'.
2626
a933dad1
DL
2627** New face implementation.
2628
2629Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2630font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2631
2632+++
2633*** New faces.
2634
2635Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2636
2637 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2638
a933dad1
DL
2639 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2640 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2641
a933dad1 2642 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2643
a933dad1 2644 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2645
a933dad1 2646 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2647
a933dad1 2648 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2649
a933dad1
DL
2650 7. Background color.
2651
2652 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2653
2654 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2655
2656 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2657
2658 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2659
2660 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2661 color.
2662
2663 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2664 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2665
2666Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2667same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2668frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2669faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2670with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2671attributes mentioned above.
2672
2673There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2674definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2675created frames.
79214ddf 2676
a933dad1
DL
2677A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2678have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2679`fully-specified'.
2680
2681+++
2682*** Face merging.
2683
2684The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2685combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2686aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2687properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2688that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2689results in a fully-specified face.
2690
2691+++
2692*** Face realization.
2693
2694After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2695merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2696realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2697available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2698face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2699cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2700
2701Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2702character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2703for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2704charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2705
2706Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2707specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2708being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2709the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2710statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2711
2712In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2713`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
27140x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2715the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2716initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2717Emacs.
2718
2719Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2720`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2721registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2722with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2723
2724++++
2725**** Clearing face caches.
2726
2727The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2728on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2729unused fonts.
2730
2731+++
2732*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2733
a933dad1
DL
2734Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2735given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2736for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2737
2738If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2739pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2740family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2741property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2742an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2743
2744Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2745against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2746match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2747
2748Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2749
2750The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2751attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2752face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2753names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2754that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2755width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2756to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2757
2758Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2759specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2760face doesn't exist.
2761
2762+++
2763**** Scalable fonts
2764
2765Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2766since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2767servers.
2768
2769To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2770`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2771scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2772Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2773scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2774that list. Example:
2775
2776 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2777
2778allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2779
2780+++
2781*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2782
2783- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2784
2785Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2786is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2787string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2788
2789If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2790the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2791FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2792POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2793SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2794These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2795if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2796REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2797the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2798of the face font sort order.
2799
79214ddf 2800- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2801
2802Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2803omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2804(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2805non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2806
2807- Variable: font-list-limit
2808
2809Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2810won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2811matching font. The default is currently 100.
2812
2813+++
2814*** Setting face attributes.
2815
2816For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2817with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2818implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2819`face-attribute'.
2820
2821Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2822symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2823
2824The following attributes are recognized:
2825
2826`:family'
2827
2828VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2829or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2830and `?' are allowed.
2831
2832`:width'
2833
2834VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2835It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2836`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2837`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2838
2839`:height'
2840
787345ff
MB
2841VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
2842in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
2843scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
2844height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
2845
2846`:weight'
2847
2848VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2849symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2850`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2851
2852`:slant'
2853
2854VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2855symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2856`reverse-oblique'.
2857
2858`:foreground', `:background'
2859
2860VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2861
2862`:underline'
2863
2864VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2865VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2866a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2867don't underline.
2868
2869`:overline'
2870
2871VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2872VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2873string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2874overline.
2875
2876`:strike-through'
2877
2878VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2879striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2880face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2881is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2882
2883`:box'
2884
2885VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2886around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2887VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2888of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2889and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2890VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2891:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2892the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2893specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2894defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2895the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2896color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2897should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2898like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2899that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2900the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2901box.
2902
2903`:inverse-video'
2904
2905VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2906inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2907
2908`:stipple'
2909
2910If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2911The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2912searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2913HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2914is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2915explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2916
2917For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2918and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2919
2920`:font'
2921
2922Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2923XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2924is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2925versions of Emacs.
2926
2927For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2928be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2929must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2930
2931Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2932`defface'.
2933
787345ff
MB
2934`:inherit'
2935
2936VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
2937of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
2938like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
2939
a933dad1
DL
2940*** Face attributes and X resources
2941
2942The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2943from X resources:
2944
2945 Face attribute X resource class
2946-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2947 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2948 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2949 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2950 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2951 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2952 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2953 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2954 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2955 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2956 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2957 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2958 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2959 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2960 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2961 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2962 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2963 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2964 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2965 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2966
2967+++
2968*** Text property `face'.
2969
2970The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2971specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2972specification can be
2973
29741. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2975
29762. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2977 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2978 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2979 for face attribute names.
2980
29813. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2982 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2983 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2984
2985+++
2986** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2987
acf3ecb7
EZ
2988The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2989on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2990the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2991default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2992`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2993used to clear the mapping table.
2994
acf3ecb7
EZ
2995** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2996
2997The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2998and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2999type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3000color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3001display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3002old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3003`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3004compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3005should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3006modify their color-related behavior.
3007
3008The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3009any frame type.
3010
8a5719f0
EZ
3011** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3012
3013The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3014`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3015`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3016`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3017`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3018`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3019display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3020the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3021platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3022
a933dad1
DL
3023+++
3024** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3025
463cac2d 3026This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
3027
3028The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3029end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3030Otherwise, it returns zero.
3031
463cac2d
GM
3032** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3033
3034There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3035buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3036property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3037
9a9dfda8 3038Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3039forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3040to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3041not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3042commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3043boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3044`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3045functions.
463cac2d
GM
3046
3047Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3048a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3049editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3050
9a9dfda8
GM
3051The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3052
59927f88 3053- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3054
3055Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3056
9a9dfda8
GM
3057A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3058If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3059constrained position if that is is different.
3060
3061If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3062positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3063ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3064constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3065as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3066is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3067fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3068the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3069also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3070
3071If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3072NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3073unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3074C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3075only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3076
59927f88
MB
3077If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3078a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3079
3080Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3081
3082- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3083
59927f88 3084Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3085A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3086If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3087
3088- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3089
3090Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3091A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3092If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3093If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3094field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3095
3096- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3097
3098Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3099A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3100If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3101If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3102then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3103
3104- Function: field-string &optional POS
3105
3106Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3107A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3108If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3109
3110- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3111
3112Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3113A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3114If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3115
a933dad1
DL
3116+++
3117** Image support.
3118
3119Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3120strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3121(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3122replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3123
3124If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3125`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3126AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3127window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3128area.
3129
3130IMAGE is an image specification.
3131
3132*** Image specifications
3133
3134Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3135is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3136specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3137symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3138described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3139
3140The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3141
3142`:ascent ASCENT'
3143
576da55d
GM
3144ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3145If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3146to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3147
3148If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3149image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3150
5d94f558 3151If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3152centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3153of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3154overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3155
3156`:margin MARGIN'
3157
79214ddf 3158MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3159margin around the image. Default is 0.
3160
3161`:relief RELIEF'
3162
3163RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3164around an image.
3165
3166`:algorithm ALGO'
3167
47e351a3
GM
3168Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3169
3170ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3171edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3172
3173ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3174apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3175nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3176position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3177around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3178neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3179transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3180x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3181below.
3182
3183 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3184 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3185 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3186
3187The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3188resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3189multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3190of the factors' absolute values.
3191
327652be 3192Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3193
47e351a3
GM
3194 (1 0 0
3195 0 0 0
3196 9 9 -1)
3197
3198Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3199
3200 ( 2 -1 0
3201 -1 0 1
3202 0 1 -2)
3203
ba9eeda1
GM
3204ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3205``disabled''.
3206
47e351a3
GM
3207`:mask MASK'
3208
3209If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3210the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3211image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3212background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3213image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3214the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3215GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3216image.
a933dad1 3217
47e351a3
GM
3218If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3219in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3220`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3221
3222`:file FILE'
3223
3224Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3225search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3226building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3227may be present in the image specification.
3228
518df5c4
GM
3229`:data DATA'
3230
3231Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3232supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3233present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3234support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3235
a933dad1
DL
3236*** Supported image types
3237
b246b1f6 3238**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3239
3240XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3241properties supported are
3242
3243`:foreground FG'
3244
3245FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3246is the frame's foreground.
3247
3248`:background FG'
3249
3250BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3251the frame's background color.
3252
3253XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3254case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3255instead of a `:file' property.
3256
3257`:width WIDTH'
3258
3259WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3260
3261`:height HEIGHT'
3262
3263HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3264
3265`:data DATA'
3266
3267DATA must be either
3268
3269 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3270 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3271
3272 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3273
3274 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3275 bitmap.
3276
c76e04a8
GM
3277 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3278 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3279 in the file.
3280
a933dad1
DL
3281**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3282
3283XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3284`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3285found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3286`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3287
3288Additional image properties supported are:
3289
3290`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3291
3292SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3293name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3294name.
3295
3296XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3297add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3298
a933dad1
DL
3299The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3300to display compressed images.
3301
3302**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3303
3304PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
3305mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
3306defined.
3307
3308**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3309
3310Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3311package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3312are:
3313
a933dad1
DL
3314**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3315
3316Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3317package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3318properties defined.
3319
3320**** GIF, image type `gif'
3321
3322Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3323`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3324
3325Additional image properties supported are:
3326
3327`:index INDEX'
3328
3329INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3330multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3331
3332This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3333For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3334at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3335every 0.1 seconds.
3336
3337(defun show-anim (file max)
3338 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3339 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3340
3341(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3342 (when (= idx max)
3343 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3344 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3345 (save-excursion
3346 (set-buffer buffer)
3347 (goto-char (point-min))
3348 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3349 (insert-image img "x"))
3350 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3351
3352**** PNG, image type `png'
3353
3354Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3355package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3356properties defined.
3357
3358**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3359
3360Additional image properties supported are:
3361
3362`:pt-width WIDTH'
3363
3364WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3365integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3366
3367`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3368
3369HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3370must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3371
3372`:bounding-box BOX'
3373
3374BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3375the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3376files. This is an required property.
3377
3378Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3379lisp/gs.el.
3380
3381*** Lisp interface.
3382
79214ddf
FP
3383The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3384which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3385
3386Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3387they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3388The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3389manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3390images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3391
3392*** Simplified image API, image.el
3393
3394The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3395creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3396can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3397define an image based on available image types. The functions
3398`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3399buffer.
3400
3401+++
3402** Display margins.
3403
3404Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3405and images.
3406
3407To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3408`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3409`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3410obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3411`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3412the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3413of the display margins.
3414
3415You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3416containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3417one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3418string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3419in this file).
3420
3421+++
3422** Help display
3423
3424Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3425moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3426`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3427that have a `help-echo' property.
3428
9662da0b 3429If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3430is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3431the window in which the help was found.
3432
3433If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3434`help-echo' text property was found.
3435
3436If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3437POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3438
3439If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3440the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3441mouse.
d5aa31d8 3442
9662da0b
GM
3443If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3444string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3445
3446For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3447determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3448property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3449For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3450used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3451
3452The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3453the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3454causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3455
3456+++
3457** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3458
3459The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3460This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3461
3462The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3463scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3464The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3465scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3466used.
3467
79214ddf
FP
3468 (global-set-key [A-down]
3469 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3470 (interactive)
79214ddf 3471 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3472 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3473 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3474 #'(lambda ()
3475 (interactive)
79214ddf 3476 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3477 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3478
3479+++
3480** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3481
3482Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3483when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3484variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3485is called with one argument, POS.
3486
3487At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3488characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3489as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3490property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3491`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3492
3493+++
3494** Tool bar support.
3495
3496Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3497parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3498controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3499suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3500`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3501automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3502
3503*** Tool bar item definitions
3504
3505Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3506`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3507where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3508
a933dad1
DL
3509CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3510evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3511the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3512property (see below).
79214ddf 3513
a933dad1
DL
3514BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3515binding are currently ignored.
3516
3517The following properties are recognized:
3518
3519`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3520
a933dad1
DL
3521FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3522or disabled.
79214ddf 3523
a933dad1 3524`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3525
a933dad1 3526FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3527
a933dad1
DL
3528`:filter FUNCTION'
3529
3530FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3531FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3532used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3533
a933dad1
DL
3534`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3535
3536TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3537and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3538
a933dad1
DL
3539`:image IMAGES'
3540
3541IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3542image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3543meaning of each of the four elements:
3544
3545 Index Use when item is
3546 ----------------------------------------
3547 0 enabled and selected
3548 1 enabled and deselected
3549 2 disabled and selected
3550 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3551
4ba7246d
GM
3552If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3553algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3554
a933dad1 3555`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3556
a933dad1
DL
3557Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3558is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3559
dab96841 3560The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3561toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3562to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3563menu bar.
dab96841 3564
a933dad1
DL
3565*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3566
3567If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3568resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3569than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3570
79214ddf 3571If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3572raised when the mouse moves over them.
3573
3574You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3575`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3576pixels. Default is 1.
3577
3578You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3579`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3580
3581*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3582
3583You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3584a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3585
3586 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3587 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3588 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3589
3590is the original tool bar item definition, then
3591
3592 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3593
3594makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3595item.
3596
3597** Mode line changes.
3598
3599+++
3600*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3601
3602The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3603that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3604a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3605
36061. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3607a `local-map' text property.
3608
36092. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3610that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3611
36123. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3613is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3614`local-map' property.
3615
3616The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3617properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3618example.
3619
54522c9f
GM
3620*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3621evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3622
a933dad1
DL
3623+++
3624*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3625variable mode-line-format to nil.
3626
3627+++
3628*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3629
3630This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3631`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3632completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3633`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3634line.
3635
3636The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3637`header-line'.
3638
3639The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3640position in the header-line.
3641
3642+++
3643** Text property `display'
3644
623a0aae
GM
3645The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3646replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3647also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3648the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3649below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3650
623a0aae
GM
3651*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3652
3653To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3654text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3655
3656If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3657marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3658the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3659is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3660simpler form STRING as property value.
3661
a933dad1
DL
3662*** Variable width and height spaces
3663
3664To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3665specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3666`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3667area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3668marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3669displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3670simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3671
3672The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3673PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3674properties described below.
3675
3676The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3677characters having the `display' property.
3678
3679- :width WIDTH
3680
3681Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3682character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3683
3684- :relative-width FACTOR
3685
3686Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3687first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3688same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3689width of that character by FACTOR.
3690
3691- :align-to HPOS
3692
3693Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3694value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3695
3696Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3697
3698- :height HEIGHT
3699
3700Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3701normal line height.
3702
3703- :relative-height FACTOR
3704
3705The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3706of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3707
3708- :ascent ASCENT
3709
3710Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3711used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3712baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3713equal to 100.
3714
3715You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3716
3717*** Images
3718
3719A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3720. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3721in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3722their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3723the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3724`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3725area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3726the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3727as display specification.
3728
3729*** Other display properties
3730
3731- :space-width FACTOR
3732
3733Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3734should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3735integer or float.
3736
3737- :height HEIGHT
3738
3739Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3740
3741If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3742means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3743the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3744``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3745a font is available counts as a step.
3746
3747If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3748as tall as the frame's default font.
3749
3750If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3751height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3752
3753Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3754`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3755
3756- :raise FACTOR
3757
3758FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3759font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3760raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3761amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3762`:height' subproperty.
3763
3764*** Conditional display properties
3765
3766All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3767has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3768applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3769During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3770the text having the `display' property.
3771
3772The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3773`(:when t SPEC)'.
3774
3775+++
3776** New menu separator types.
3777
3778Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3779item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3780treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3781to specify other menu separator types.
3782
3783- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3784
3785No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3786separator occurs.
3787
3788- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3789
3790A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3791
3792- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3793
3794A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3795
3796- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3797
3798A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3799
3800- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3801
3802A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3803
3804- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3805
3806A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3807displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3808
3809- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3810
3811A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3812
3813- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3814
3815A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3816
3817- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3818
3819A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3820
3821- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3822
3823Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3824
3825- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3826
3827Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3828
3829- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3830
3831Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3832
3833- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3834
3835Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3836
3837Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3838the corresponding single-line separators.
3839
3840+++
3841** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3842
3843The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3844`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3845Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3846that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3847default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3848default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3849default foreground is black.
3850
3851The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3852(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3853`ScrollBarBackground').
3854
3855Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3856settings for scroll bar colors.
3857
3858+++
3859** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3860display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3861
3862---
3863** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3864starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3865on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3866line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3867the original window start.
3868
3869---
3870** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3871`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3872now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3873
3874+++
3875** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3876
3877A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3878`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3879windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3880other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3881
3882The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3883fixed-width and fixed-height.
3884
3885 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3886
3887A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3888fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3889window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3890change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3891temporarily to nil, for example
3892
3893 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3894 (enlarge-window 10))
3895
79214ddf 3896Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3897or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3898
3899** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3900terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3901to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3902overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3903horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3904support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3905
3787e12e
GM
3906
3907^L
3908* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3909
3910** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3911input.
3912
3913** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3914
3915** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3916
3917** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3918only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3919exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3920(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3921(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3922
3923** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3924been added.
3925
3926^L
3927* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3928
3929** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3930
3931^L
3932* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3933
3934** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3935M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3936\f
3937* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3938
3939** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3940
3941You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3942Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3943`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3944
3945If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3946is the one that is used.
3947
3948** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3949the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3950Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3951separate from the command's regular output.
3952Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3953says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3954In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3955the buffer name.
3956
3957When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3958output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3959it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3960cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3961
3962** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3963the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3964is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3965created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3966
3967** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3968example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3969match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3970quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3971
3972** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3973now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3974if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3975they never ignore case.
3976
3977** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3978under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3979applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3980of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3981just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3982convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3983part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3984
3985If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3986the same format that was used in the file before.
3987
3988You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3989`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3990
3991** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3992renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3993This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3994
3995** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3996The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3997buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3998your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3999is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4000end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4001Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4002
4003The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4004eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4005control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4006format. You can now customize these variables.
4007
4008** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4009filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4010filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4011enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4012
4013** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4014in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4015windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4016
4017** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4018dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4019doesn't have any effect.
4020
4021** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4022not one per buffer.
4023
4024** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4025use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4026 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4027
4028** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4029To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4030`auto-show-mode' command.
4031
4032** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4033avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4034versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4035choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4036occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4037
4038** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4039cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4040
4041** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4042character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4043feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4044
4045** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4046the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4047interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4048and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4049
4050** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4051
4052The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4053that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4054one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4055codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4056set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4057
4058Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4059from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4060
4061IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4062equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4063a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4064`?' on other systems.
4065
4066IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4067feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4068Unix.
4069
4070Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4071current codepage when it starts.
4072
4073** Mail changes
4074
4075*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4076`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4077appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4078non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4079MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4080headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4081latin-1:
4082
4083 MIME-version: 1.0
4084 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4085 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4086
4087*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4088default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4089default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4090sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4091buffer-file-coding-system.
4092
4093You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4094sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4095mail.
4096
4097*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4098if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4099Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4100list of possible coding systems.
4101
4102** CC Mode changes
4103
4104*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4105modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4106longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4107docstring for details.
4108
4109*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4110symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4111found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4112prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4113lineup functions use this feature currently.
4114
4115*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4116"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4117
4118*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4119"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4120
4121*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4122from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4123symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4124c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4125anonymous classes.
4126
4127*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4128syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4129
4130*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4131inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4132support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4133function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4134
4135*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4136(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4137brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4138c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4139(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4140
4141*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4142
4143*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4144
4145*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4146for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4147
4148*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4149
4150*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4151associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4152This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4153circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4154class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4155
4156** Gnus changes.
4157
4158*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4159added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4160Gnus manual for the full story.
4161
4162*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4163before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4164group, which is created automatically.
4165
4166*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4167values.
4168
4169*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4170
4171*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4172outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4173
4174*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4175`C-u C-c C-c'.
4176
4177*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4178
4179*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4180re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4181
4182*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4183
4184*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4185Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4186
4187*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4188`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4189
4190*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4191control over simplification.
4192
4193*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4194
4195*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4196limit.
4197
4198*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4199
4200*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4201
4202*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4203If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4204rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4205
4206*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4207`a' forces normal posting method.
4208
4209*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4210-- `W d'.
4211
4212*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4213to a non-nil value.
4214
4215*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4216where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4217
4218*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4219has been added.
4220
4221*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4222
4223*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4224
4225*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4226`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4227
4228*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4229`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4230
4231*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4232
4233*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4234been added.
4235
4236*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4237`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4238
4239*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4240updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4241
4242*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4243
4244*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4245
4246*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4247
4248** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4249
4250*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4251options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4252nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4253
4254*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4255TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4256of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4257TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4258can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4259
4260*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4261All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4262but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4263the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4264
4265*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4266the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4267buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4268mismatch.
4269
4270** Changes to RefTeX mode
4271
4272*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4273file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4274
4275*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4276lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4277characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4278removed from the label.
4279
4280*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4281a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4282
4283*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4284customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4285
4286*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4287`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4288expressions.
4289
4290*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4291
4292** New/deleted modes and packages
4293
4294*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4295SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4296
4297*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4298editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4299SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4300
4301*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4302changes with a special face.
4303
4304*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4305this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4306Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4307\f
4308* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4309
4310** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4311This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4312conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4313and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4314check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4315
4316The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4317Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4318distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4319
4320** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4321MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4322controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4323directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4324Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4325on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4326string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4327program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4328printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4329
4330** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4331output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4332available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4333input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4334temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4335program.
4336
4337An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4338and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4339programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4340automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4341as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4342ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4343
4344** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4345a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4346MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4347was not documented clearly before.
4348
4349** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4350This includes Tetris and Snake.
4351\f
4352* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4353
4354** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4355return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4356They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4357meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4358
4359** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4360WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4361and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4362
4363** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4364
4365*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4366It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4367
4368*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4369the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4370integers.
4371
4372** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4373files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4374arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4375file names and attributes are returned.
4376
4377** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4378sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4379accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4380It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4381returns the result.
4382
4383** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4384to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4385
4386** New functions for base64 conversion:
4387
4388The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4389into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4390performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4391optionally.
4392
4393Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4394job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4395
4396**
4397The new function process-running-child-p
4398will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4399terminal to its own child process.
4400
4401** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4402when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4403to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4404itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4405
4406** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4407be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4408
4409** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4410:included is an alias for :visible.
4411
4412easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4413easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4414to move or copy menu entries.
4415
4416** Multibyte editing changes
4417
4418*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4419an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4420make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4421work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4422char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4423 (setq char (sref str idx)
4424 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4425The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4426
4427If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4428(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4429 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4430
4431*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4432region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4433deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4434
4435 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4436
4437This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4438across the boundary.
4439
4440*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4441`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4442 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4443 contains 8-bit characters.
4444 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4445 contains invalid characters.
4446
4447*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4448text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4449preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4450text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4451way.
4452
4453*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4454If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4455end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4456prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4457
4458*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4459compose Thai characters in a string.
4460
4461** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4462argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4463for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4464menus should always use the third argument.
4465
4466** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4467read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4468arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4469input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4470
4471** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4472of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4473programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4474inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4475
4476** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4477the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4478returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4479echo area contents.
4480
4481 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4482
4483** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4484NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4485requested feature cannot be loaded.
4486
4487** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4488foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4489means to clear out that attribute.
4490
4491** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4492gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4493
4494** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4495read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4496unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4497end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4498
4499** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4500the gap of the current buffer.
4501
4502** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4503to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4504current buffer.
4505
4506** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4507facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4508These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4509it back in after any modifications have been made.
4510\f
4511* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4512
4513** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4514the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4515/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4516directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4517subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4518
4519Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4520names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4521Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4522which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4523these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4524
4525Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4526starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4527time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4528
4529This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4530Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4531to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4532subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4533`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4534results.
4535
4536** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4537GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4538that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4539fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4540\f
4541* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4542
4543** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4544including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4545it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4546perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4547
4548** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4549specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4550region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4551further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4552command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4553within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4554are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4555region.
4556
4557In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4558selective undo.
4559
4560** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4561unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4562buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4563effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4564Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4565
4566The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4567though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4568-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4569load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4570
4571** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4572no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4573enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4574something that most users not do.
4575
4576** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4577operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4578The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4579applications.
4580
4581C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4582pasting operations.
4583
4584** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4585setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4586like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4587printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4588`ps-printer-name'.
4589
4590** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4591minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4592any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4593except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4594incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4595hits a new word.
4596
4597Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4598Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4599to be confused by TeX commands.
4600
4601You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4602correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4603clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4604of various alternative replacements and actions.
4605
4606Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4607the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4608corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4609alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4610flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4611
4612Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4613flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4614
4615** Changes in input method usage.
4616
4617Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4618the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4619respectively.
4620
4621You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4622
4623If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4624of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4625
4626The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4627that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4628
4629 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4630
4631 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4632
4633 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4634 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4635
4636 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4637 given in the following case:
4638 o When you are using a complex input method.
4639 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4640
4641If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4642input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4643and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4644setting it to t is helpful.
4645
4646The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4647
4648In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4649keys:
4650 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4651 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4652 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4653These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4654environment.
4655
4656** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4657names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4658minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4659get
4660
4661 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4662
4663which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4664
4665Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4666Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4667
4668** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4669at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4670its owner and group.
4671
4672** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4673Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4674
4675** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4676contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4677
4678** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4679which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4680in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4681by the left edge of the rectangle.
4682
4683** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4684increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4685C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4686for writing keyboard macros.
4687
4688** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4689files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4690frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4691the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4692additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4693info.
4694
4695** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4696
4697** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4698query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4699contents only.
4700
4701** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4702confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4703the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4704says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4705
4706** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4707non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4708literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4709
4710** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4711now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4712Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4713inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4714
4715** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4716failure if the command produces no output.
4717
4718** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4719manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4720the mouse.
4721
4722** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4723mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4724function and variable names.
4725
4726** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4727reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4728file-coding-system-alist.
4729
4730** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4731t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4732converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4733the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4734according to the current fontset.
4735
4736** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4737
4738The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4739that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4740nonascii-insert-offset.
4741
4742For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4743enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4744nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4745characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4746
4747** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4748an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4749
4750** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4751letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4752
4753** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4754are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4755command keys.
4756
4757** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4758user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4759
4760Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4761user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4762all variables that have documentation.
4763
4764** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4765shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4766that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4767minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4768it should show; the default is 20.
4769
4770Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4771the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4772of your input.
4773
4774** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4775all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4776recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4777argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4778the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4779Newly added options are included as well.
4780
4781If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4782then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4783for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4784
4785This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4786Customize menu.
4787
4788** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4789the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4790
4791** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4792buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4793invoked.
4794
4795** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4796that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4797The default is 1.
4798
4799** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4800syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4801new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4802(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4803sensibly.
4804
4805** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4806
4807** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4808value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4809two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4810
4811** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4812reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4813for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4814every night.
4815
4816** Desktop changes
4817
4818*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4819the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4820
4821*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4822and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4823
4824** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4825read and post multi-lingual articles.
4826
4827** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4828doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4829be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4830outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4831the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4832made invisible again.
4833
4834** Mail reading and sending changes
4835
4836*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4837the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4838changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4839toggle.
4840
4841*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4842now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4843summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4844the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4845rmail-default-body-file.
4846
4847*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4848longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4849handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4850
4851*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4852it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4853is evaluated to insert the signature.
4854
4855*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4856outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4857handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4858putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4859transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4860especially interested in trying feedmail.
4861
4862feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4863feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4864provided by feedmail are:
4865
4866**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4867stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4868there is also a queue for draft messages
4869
4870**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4871be prompted for confirmation
4872
4873**** does smart filling of address headers
4874
4875**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4876the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4877can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4878
4879**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4880the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4881/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4882function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4883
4884** Dired changes
4885
4886*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4887files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4888
4889*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4890run Dired on the directory name at point.
4891
4892*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4893files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4894for a specified regexp.
4895
4896** VC Changes
4897
4898*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4899conveniently.
4900
4901*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4902faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4903Dired.
4904
4905VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4906directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4907listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4908currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4909
4910You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4911then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4912vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4913control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4914on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4915
4916All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4917is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4918`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4919the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4920`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4921
4922The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4923toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4924VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4925`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4926
4927Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4928ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4929command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4930
4931*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4932file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4933session to resolve them.
4934
4935Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4936resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4937contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4938uses as well).
4939
4940*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4941command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4942you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4943either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4944branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4945If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4946using ediff.
4947
4948** Changes in Font Lock
4949
4950*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4951are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4952use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4953unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4954compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4955
4956** Frame name display changes
4957
4958*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4959frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4960raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4961when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4962
4963*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4964frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4965menu.
4966
4967** Comint (subshell) changes
4968
4969*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4970subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4971with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4972
4973*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4974
4975C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4976that is, the line after the last line you got.
4977You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4978
4979C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4980send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4981the following line.
4982
4983C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4984which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4985previously sent input.
4986
4987C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4988it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4989as the search string.
4990
4991*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4992automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4993
4994** C mode changes
4995
4996*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4997and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4998assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4999definition.
5000
5001*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5002(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5003Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5004style is still the default however.
5005
5006*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5007
5008*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5009are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5010them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5011
5012*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5013and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5014
5015*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5016namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5017
5018*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5019makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5020
5021*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5022c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5023
5024*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5025should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5026package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5027variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5028
5029** Changes to hippie-expand.
5030
5031*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5032non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5033which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5034
5035*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5036non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5037expanding dynamically.
5038
5039*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5040non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5041
5042*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5043non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5044this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5045expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5046
5047*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5048
5049** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5050
5051*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5052bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5053automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5054bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5055against the first word in the title.
5056
5057*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5058capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5059bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5060lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5061lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5062bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5063
5064*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5065generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5066replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5067bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5068
5069** Changes in vcursor.el.
5070
5071*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5072and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5073variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5074entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5075`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5076in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5077
5078*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5079Editing group once the package is loaded.
5080
5081*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5082generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5083vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5084
5085*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5086vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5087
5088** Ispell changes.
5089
5090*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5091buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5092are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5093
5094*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5095A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5096and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5097defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5098include:
5099
5100 o URLs are automatically skipped
5101 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5102
5103*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5104
5105** Changes to RefTeX mode
5106
5107RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5108large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5109re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5110section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5111
5112*** New recursive parser.
5113
5114The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5115entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5116recursive parser scans the individual files.
5117
5118*** Parsing only part of a document.
5119
5120Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5121partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5122the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5123
5124 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5125
5126*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5127
5128This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5129
5130 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5131
5132*** Using multiple selection buffers
5133
5134If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5135for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5136
5137 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5138
5139*** References to external documents.
5140
5141The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5142documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5143documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5144macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5145RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5146the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5147The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5148
5149*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5150
5151The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5152and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5153
5154Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5155the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5156
5157*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5158
5159The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5160buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5161
5162*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5163
5164The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5165contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5166`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5167have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5168enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5169at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5170more.
5171
5172*** Support for the varioref package
5173
5174The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5175
5176*** New hooks
5177
5178Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5179and citations are created. These hooks are
5180`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5181`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5182
5183*** Citations outside LaTeX
5184
5185The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5186a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5187
5188*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5189
5190The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5191fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5192fontified, use
5193
5194 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5195
5196** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5197With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5198the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5199directories that contain the same file name.
5200
5201Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5202Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5203file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5204Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5205have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5206names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5207directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5208directory.
5209
5210** New modes and packages
5211
5212*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5213It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5214it, but some do not.
5215
5216*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5217code.
5218
5219*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5220current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5221around in a buffer.
5222
5223Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5224
5225*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5226uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5227be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5228established system of notation similar to Chess.
5229
5230*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5231documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5232guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5233
5234*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5235available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5236system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5237simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5238functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5239the like.
5240
5241*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5242identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5243
5244*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5245within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5246used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5247the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5248
5249*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5250
5251 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5252 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5253 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5254 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5255 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5256 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5257 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5258 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5259 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5260 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5261 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5262
5263 Platform-specific modes:
5264
5265 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5266 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5267 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5268 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5269 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5270 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5271 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5272 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5273 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5274\f
5275* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5276
5277** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5278use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5279That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5280Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5281
5282Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5283you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5284consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5285
5286** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5287and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5288specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5289searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5290
5291** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5292multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5293character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5294environment.
5295
5296** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5297take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5298string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5299current input method for reading this one event.
5300
5301** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5302now control whether to output certain characters as
5303backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5304non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5305characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5306in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5307\f
5308* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5309
5310** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5311of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5312
5313** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5314in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5315always increases point by 1.
5316
5317The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5318considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5319
5320See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5321
5322** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5323Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5324default value changed. For example,
5325
5326 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5327 :type 'integer
5328 :group 'foo
5329 :version "20.3")
5330
5331 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5332 :version "20.3")
5333
5334If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5335default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5336is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5337`:version' in the top level group.
5338
5339This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5340
5341** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5342starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5343
5344However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5345symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5346support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5347to themselves.
5348
5349If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5350this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5351values whatever.
5352
5353** There is a new debugger command, R.
5354It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5355in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5356
5357** Frame-local variables.
5358
5359You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5360the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5361local bindings for that variable.
5362
5363These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5364frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5365modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5366parameter name.
5367
5368Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5369Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5370active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5371that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5372
5373It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5374clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5375very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5376through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5377
5378** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5379"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5380evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5381makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5382See the documentation in sregex.el.
5383
5384** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5385is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5386parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5387The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5388
5389** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5390If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5391
5392** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5393known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5394define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5395
5396** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5397when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5398it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5399history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5400
5401The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5402return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5403empty input.
5404
5405** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5406for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5407`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5408Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5409`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5410
5411** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5412echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5413a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5414default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5415
5416** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5417specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5418function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5419place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5420non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5421
5422** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5423If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5424up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5425end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5426
5427** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5428which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5429If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5430
5431** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5432holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5433was directed to display this buffer.
5434
5435** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5436with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5437describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5438other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5439set-window-configuration.
5440
5441** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5442window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5443positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5444windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5445
5446** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5447override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5448look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5449
5450If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5451non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5452map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5453
5454minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5455and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5456
5457** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5458except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5459
5460** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5461USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5462floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5463
5464** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5465to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5466in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5467it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5468
5469** Menu changes
5470
5471*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5472keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5473better supported.
5474
5475The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5476a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5477you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5478can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5479then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5480
5481*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5482
5483In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5484 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5485defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5486starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5487
5488The format is:
5489 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5490 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5491where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5492string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5493The supported properties include
5494
5495:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5496 item is enabled.
5497:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5498 item should appear in the menu.
5499:filter FILTER-FN
5500 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5501 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5502 It should return a binding to use instead.
5503:keys DESCRIPTION
5504 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5505 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5506 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5507:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5508 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5509 keyboard binding.
5510:key-sequence nil
5511 This means that the command normally has no
5512 keyboard equivalent.
5513:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5514:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5515 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5516 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5517 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5518
5519Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5520Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5521
5522(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5523
5524** New event types
5525
5526*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5527mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5528corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5529which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5530
5531 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5532
5533where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5534same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5535indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5536negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5537the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5538forward, away from the user.
5539
5540As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5541
5542*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5543files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5544and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5545filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5546loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5547
5548 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5549
5550where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5551same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5552that were dragged and dropped.
5553
5554As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5555
5556** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5557
5558*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5559any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5560to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5561
5562*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5563can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5564that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5565
5566*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5567in Emacs 19 and before.
5568
5569The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5570The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5571
5572*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5573buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5574unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5575representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5576
5577This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5578as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5579viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5580one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5581will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5582
5583This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5584representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5585(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5586consistent with the new representation.
5587
5588*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5589representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5590about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5591however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5592
5593The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5594nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5595using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5596
5597*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5598representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5599representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5600
5601The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5602loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5603is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5604
5605*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5606which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5607
5608*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5609which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5610
5611*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5612portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5613so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5614You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5615
5616*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5617it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5618
5619*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5620convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5621buffer or string being searched.
5622
5623One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5624[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5625searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5626searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5627obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5628you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5629expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5630
5631*** Structure of coding system changed.
5632
5633All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5634by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5635which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5636as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5637vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5638your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5639define-coding-system-alias.
5640
5641The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5642the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5643access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5644pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5645character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5646safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5647'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5648`iso-8859-1'.
5649
5650Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5651The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5652coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5653(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5654
5655Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5656also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5657are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5658the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5659
5660*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5661proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5662This function requires a user interaction.
5663
5664*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5665find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5666select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5667systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5668a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5669select-safe-coding-system.
5670
5671*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5672decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5673last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5674was done.
5675
5676*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5677used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5678coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5679
5680*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5681return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5682characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5683`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5684
5685*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5686coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5687coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5688converted.
5689
5690*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5691coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5692
5693*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5694character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5695character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5696each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5697either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5698range of characters.
5699
5700*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5701Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5702
5703*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5704in the current buffer at position POS.
5705
5706*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5707input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5708function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5709character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5710event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5711binding input-method-function to nil.
5712
5713The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5714method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5715input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5716the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5717not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5718
5719The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5720subsequent events of a key sequence.
5721
5722*** You can customize any language environment by using
5723set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5724
5725The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5726customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5727instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5728environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5729exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5730\f
5731* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5732
5733** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5734options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5735at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5736tree structure.
5737
5738M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5739user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5740
5741With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5742session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5743in your .emacs file.)
5744
5745** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5746You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5747
5748** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5749This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5750
5751** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5752immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5753kills the region.
5754
5755The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5756delete the character before point, as usual.
5757
5758** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5759on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5760by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5761
5762** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5763insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5764the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5765onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5766history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5767past.)
5768
5769** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5770This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5771in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5772TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5773makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5774
5775As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5776and is an alias for it.
5777
5778If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5779use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5780
5781** Scrolling changes
5782
5783*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5784position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5785
5786In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5787on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5788where it started.
5789
5790*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5791move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5792screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5793does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5794
5795*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5796top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5797comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5798recenters the window.
5799
5800** International character set support (MULE)
5801
5802Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5803including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5804Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5805Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5806features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5807MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5808
5809Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5810coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5811character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5812variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5813into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5814
5815Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5816generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5817supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5818language, to make it possible to type them.
5819
5820The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5821character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5822
5823The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5824to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5825
5826You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5827
5828 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5829
5830Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5831characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5832argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5833already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5834characters for their work until they want to change.
5835
5836*** Input methods
5837
5838An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5839specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5840has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5841the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5842support several input methods.
5843
5844The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5845another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5846work.
5847
5848A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5849characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5850composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5851consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5852sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5853letter.
5854
5855The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5856by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5857First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5858marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5859mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5860
5861None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5862they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5863phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5864converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5865
5866Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5867word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5868typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5869the first guess is wrong.
5870
5871*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5872turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5873
5874If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5875byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5876they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5877the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5878
5879However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5880use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5881includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5882translate automatically to and from either one.
5883
5884*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5885
5886Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5887file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5888sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5889what you want.
5890
5891If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5892example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5893system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5894multibyte characters in that buffer.
5895
5896If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5897character conversion as well.
5898
5899*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5900
5901A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5902Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5903requires using many fonts.
5904
5905Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5906collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5907
5908A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5909the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5910have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5911you would use a font.
5912
5913If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5914specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5915display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5916
5917The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5918(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5919characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5920or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5921and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5922
5923*** Defining fontsets.
5924
5925Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5926chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5927with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5928
5929Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5930of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5931`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5932standard fontset are created automatically.
5933
5934If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5935argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5936FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5937with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5938name is `fontset-startup'.
5939
5940Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5941The resource value should have this form:
5942 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5943FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5944 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5945 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5946 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5947The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5948of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5949CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5950FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5951
5952Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5953last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5954You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5955
5956For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5957font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5958following resource,
5959 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5960the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5961 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5962Here is the substitution rule:
5963 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5964 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5965 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5966 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5967 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5968
5969The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5970fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5971that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5972
5973With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5974like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5975name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5976fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5977fontsets.
5978
5979*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5980defaults for a particular choice of language.
5981
5982Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5983method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5984visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5985already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5986language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5987system for new files that you create.
5988
5989It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5990set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5991whole Emacs session.
5992
5993For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5994chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5995with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5996
5997*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5998specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5999specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6000the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6001coding systems that Emacs supports.
6002
6003*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6004lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6005This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6006After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6007is used for *the immediately following command*.
6008
6009So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6010write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6011
6012If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6013then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6014
6015For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6016visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6017
6018*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6019construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6020to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6021specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6022of the file.
6023
6024*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6025the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6026code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6027translated into that character code.
6028
6029This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6030various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6031
6032By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6033
6034*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6035the coding system for keyboard input.
6036
6037Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6038with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6039some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6040
6041By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6042
6043Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6044input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6045translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6046to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6047designed to work with terminals.
6048
6049*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6050specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6051This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6052has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6053translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6054in the corresponding buffer.
6055
6056By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6057
6058*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6059to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6060It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6061
6062*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6063an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6064command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6065want to use.
6066
6067C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6068method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6069
6070*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6071layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6072remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6073which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6074
6075*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6076the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6077related information.
6078
6079*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6080HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6081scripts.
6082
6083*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6084information about the support for a particular language.
6085You specify the language as an argument.
6086
6087*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6088the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6089first dash.
6090
6091A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6092(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6093whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
60941 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6095
6096 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6097 B big5 (Chinese)
6098 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6099 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6100 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6101 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6102 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6103 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6104 K euc-korea (Korean)
6105 R koi8 (Russian)
6106 Q tibetan
6107 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6108 T lao
6109 T tis620 (Thai)
6110 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6111 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6112 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6113 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6114 z hz (Chinese)
6115
6116When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6117two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6118coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6119keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6120
6121*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6122conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6123
6124When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6125into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6126rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6127Rmail files themselves.
6128
6129*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6130conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6131
6132Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6133for sending mail:
6134
6135- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6136- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6137- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6138 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6139- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6140
6141*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6142to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6143Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6144translations.
6145
6146** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6147of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6148insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6149without any conversion.
6150
6151** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6152You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6153RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6154any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6155
6156** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6157functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6158
6159Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6160Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6161
6162Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6163mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6164
6165** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6166complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6167in the buffer before point.
6168
6169With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6170symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6171you are using.
6172
6173With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6174just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6175
6176** File locking works with NFS now.
6177
6178The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6179in the same directory as FILENAME.
6180
6181This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6182works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6183can become a bottleneck.
6184
6185The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6186does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6187create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6188file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6189rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6190so useful that the change is worth while.
6191
6192When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6193are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6194collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6195tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6196
6197** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6198it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6199show-paren-mode.
6200
6201** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6202selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6203delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6204
6205** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6206within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6207complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6208
6209** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6210it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6211set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6212
6213** Changes in View mode.
6214
6215*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6216Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6217
6218*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6219view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6220
6221*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6222previous state.
6223
6224*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6225scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6226
6227*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6228non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6229not just the selected window.
6230
6231*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6232read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6233turns View mode on or off.
6234
6235*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6236how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6237delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6238
6239** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6240now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6241
6242** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6243has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6244presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6245which version to compare with.
6246
6247** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6248blocks if a match is inside the block.
6249
6250The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6251is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6252isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6253shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6254
6255By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6256of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6257blocks, all of them or none.
6258
6259** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6260current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6261confirmation first.
6262
6263** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6264now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6265However, the mode will not be changed if
6266(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6267(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6268 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6269(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6270
6271This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6272
6273However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6274these commands do not change the major mode.
6275
6276** M-x occur changes.
6277
6278*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6279it performs a case-sensitive search.
6280
6281*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6282if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6283using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6284
6285** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6286in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6287window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6288that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6289buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6290
6291** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6292after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6293appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6294come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6295
6296** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6297selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6298buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6299
6300** Outline mode changes.
6301
6302*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6303
6304*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6305
6306** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6307you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6308Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6309was already active.
6310
6311The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6312unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6313get confused by it.
6314
6315If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6316set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6317
6318** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6319
6320*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6321conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6322character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6323including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6324
6325The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6326mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6327copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6328
6329*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6330are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6331values.
6332
6333`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6334case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6335`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6336case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6337
6338** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6339certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6340can be. The default value is 30.
6341
6342** Changes in Mail mode.
6343
6344*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6345Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6346composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6347`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6348`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6349behavior.
6350
6351C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6352compose-mail-other-frame.
6353
6354*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6355the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6356replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6357buffer that shows the original message.
6358
6359*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6360with separator lines around the contents.
6361
6362*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6363in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6364definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6365need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6366
6367*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6368
6369**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6370for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6371controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6372Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6373
6374**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6375to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6376/etc/passwd.
6377
6378**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6379to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6380/etc/passwd.
6381
6382** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6383special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6384directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6385reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6386
6387Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6388when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6389be taken to be magic.
6390
6391** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6392files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6393available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6394
6395M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6396(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6397
6398** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6399suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6400
6401In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6402
6403new key dired.el binding old key
6404------- ---------------- -------
6405 * c dired-change-marks c
6406 * m dired-mark m
6407 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6408 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6409 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6410 * u dired-unmark u
6411 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6412 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6413 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6414 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6415 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6416 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6417
6418** Rmail changes.
6419
6420*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6421saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6422chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6423each time you run it.
6424
6425*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6426whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6427
6428*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6429messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6430means to move in the opposite direction.
6431
6432*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6433you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6434
6435*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6436just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6437It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6438can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6439for output.
6440
6441** Gnus changes.
6442
6443*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6444
6445*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6446Gnus.
6447
6448*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6449`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6450
6451*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6452article mode line.
6453
6454*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6455
6456*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6457
6458(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6459
6460*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6461are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6462`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6463
6464*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6465
6466*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6467
6468*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6469See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6470
6471*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6472Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6473used to pick articles.
6474
6475*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6476another have been added.
6477
6478 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6479
6480*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6481generating lines in buffers.
6482
6483*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6484`M-C-_'.
6485
6486*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6487
6488*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6489
6490 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6491
6492*** Scores can be decayed.
6493
6494 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6495
6496*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6497Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6498
6499*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6500the native server.
6501
6502 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6503
6504*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6505(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6506
6507*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6508
6509*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6510even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6511
6512*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6513(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6514
6515 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6516 a group.
6517
6518*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6519sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6520
6521 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6522
6523*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6524
6525 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6526
6527*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6528
6529 Use the `Y c' command.
6530
6531*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6532
6533*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6534
6535 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6536
6537*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6538from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6539
6540 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6541
6542*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6543
6544*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6545the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6546
6547 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6548
6549Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6550and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6551from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6552hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6553this issue.)
6554
6555Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6556automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6557particular news group. This can be done by:
6558
6559 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6560
6561Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6562of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6563"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6564system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6565for reading and posting).
6566
6567CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6568 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6569Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6570newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6571there.
6572
6573Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6574default. Here are some of these default settings:
6575
6576 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6577 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6578 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6579 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6580 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6581
6582When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6583the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6584
6585** CC mode changes.
6586
6587*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6588code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6589values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6590this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6591Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6592loaded.
6593
6594If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6595Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6596style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6597share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6598c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6599must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6600
6601*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6602of the current buffer.
6603
6604*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6605it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6606of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6607
6608*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6609style that the Python developers like.
6610
6611*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6612This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6613just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6614
6615** VC Changes [new]
6616
6617** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6618name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6619directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6620
6621This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6622master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6623developers.
6624
6625You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6626RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6627
6628*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6629other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6630writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6631calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6632
6633*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6634version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6635
6636** Calendar changes.
6637
6638A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6639of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6640for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6641
6642** ps-print changes
6643
6644There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6645
6646*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6647
6648The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6649formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6650`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6651`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6652It defaults to `letter'.
6653If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6654
6655The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6656of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6657non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6658
6659The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6660It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6661It defaults to 1.
6662
6663*** Horizontal layout
6664
6665The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6666`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6667All are measured in points.
6668
6669*** Vertical layout
6670
6671The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6672`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6673All are measured in points.
6674
6675*** Headers
6676
6677If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6678`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6679margin above the text.
6680
6681If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6682framing box is printed around the header.
6683
6684The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6685`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6686
6687The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6688`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6689`ps-header-font-size'.
6690
6691*** Font managing
6692
6693The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6694used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6695`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6696elements to this alist.
6697
6698The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6699for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6700
6701** hideshow changes.
6702
6703*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6704C++, ; for lisp).
6705
6706*** Support for java-mode added.
6707
6708*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6709in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6710
6711*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6712the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6713way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6714
6715*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6716robust and a lot faster.
6717
6718*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6719
6720*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6721to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6722documentation for more details.
6723
6724** Changes in Enriched mode.
6725
6726*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6727filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6728of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6729use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6730the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6731
6732*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6733distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6734as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6735as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6736
6737** Font Lock mode
6738
6739*** Custom support
6740
6741The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6742font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6743faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6744group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6745your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6746consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6747
6748You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6749
6750*** Maximum decoration
6751
6752Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6753default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6754of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6755supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6756to get the old behavior.
6757
6758*** New support
6759
6760Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6761
6762Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6763support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6764
6765*** Configurable support
6766
6767Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6768additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6769c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6770java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6771list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6772of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6773convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6774
6775Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6776way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6777it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6778
6779*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6780
6781You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6782highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6783for any mode.
6784
6785For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6786
6787 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6788
6789in your ~/.emacs.
6790
6791*** New faces
6792
6793Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6794font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6795distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6796to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6797
6798*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6799
6800The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6801cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6802same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6803
6804*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6805
6806The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6807according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6808the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6809non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6810refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6811the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6812Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6813
6814This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6815For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6816this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6817refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6818containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6819the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6820
6821As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6822
6823Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6824Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6825Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6826new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6827
6828If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6829settings.
6830
6831** Ada mode changes.
6832
6833*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6834If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6835procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6836you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6837stubs.
6838
6839*** There are two new commands:
6840 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6841 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6842
6843The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6844`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6845`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6846
6847*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6848is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6849Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6850
6851*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6852formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6853places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6854space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6855
6856** Scheme mode changes.
6857
6858*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6859mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6860for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6861with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6862have any effect.
6863
6864If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6865still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6866scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6867variables as buffer-local variables.
6868
6869*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6870Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6871
6872** Changes to the emacsclient program
6873
6874*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6875USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6876associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6877can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6878
6879*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6880it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6881buffer in Emacs.
6882
6883*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6884use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6885ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6886option takes precedence.
6887
6888** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6889constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6890(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6891
6892** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6893which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6894the current defun.
6895
6896** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6897following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6898
6899** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6900and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6901necessary).
6902
6903** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6904if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6905these register values no longer become completely useless.
6906If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6907asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6908it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6909
6910** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6911example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6912be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6913you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6914
6915You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6916variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6917file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6918revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6919only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6920
6921** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6922since it applies only to the current frame.
6923
6924** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6925file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6926and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6927
6928This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6929multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6930variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6931tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6932instead of just the file you are editing.
6933
6934** RefTeX mode
6935
6936RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6937and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6938different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6939multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6940turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6941
6942C-c ( reftex-label
6943 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6944 knows which kind of label is needed.
6945
6946C-c ) reftex-reference
6947 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6948 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6949
6950C-c [ reftex-citation
6951 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6952 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6953
6954C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6955 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6956
6957C-c = reftex-toc
6958 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6959 can quickly jump to every section.
6960
6961Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6962commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6963Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6964reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6965C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6966
6967** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6968
6969*** Info documentation is now available.
6970
6971*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6972both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6973
6974*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6975bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6976
6977*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6978(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6979
6980*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6981entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6982appropriate functions.
6983
6984*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6985entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6986
6987*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6988been cleaned.
6989
6990*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6991bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6992
6993*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6994shall be delimited.
6995
6996*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6997bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6998bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6999
7000*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7001field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7002prefixed with `ALT'.
7003
7004*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7005bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7006formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7007documentation).
7008
7009*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7010documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7011for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7012
7013*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7014comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7015
7016*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7017alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7018signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7019
7020*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7021
7022*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7023
7024*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7025from alien sources.
7026
7027*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7028to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7029crossref entries.
7030
7031*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7032region.
7033
7034*** Added support for imenu.
7035
7036*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7037of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7038`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7039`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7040
7041*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7042from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7043
7044** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7045
7046** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7047
7048** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7049functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7050Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7051as an argument.
7052
7053When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7054and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7055
7056** browse-url changes
7057
7058*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7059Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7060(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7061non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7062customization variables.
7063
7064*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7065
7066*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7067lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7068(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7069
7070** Changes in Ediff
7071
7072*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7073pops up the Info file for this command.
7074
7075*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7076the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7077merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7078directories).
7079
7080*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7081and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7082files in the same directory.
7083
7084*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7085The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7086related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7087
7088** Changes in Viper
7089
7090*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7091*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7092 instead of vip-.
7093*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7094*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7095Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7096*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7097*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7098*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7099color when Viper is in insert state.
7100*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7101Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7102viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7103
7104** Etags changes.
7105
7106*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7107default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7108Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7109variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7110not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7111
7112*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7113
7114*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7115constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7116
7117*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7118recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7119In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7120
7121*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7122C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7123recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7124methods and protocols.
7125
7126*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7127.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7128column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7129paragraph name.
7130
7131*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7132an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7133at least M times and as many as N times.
7134
7135** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7136in files has changed slightly.
7137
7138With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7139time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7140This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7141with old time-stamp-format values.
7142
7143In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7144(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7145This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7146reasons.
7147
7148In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7149natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7150fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7151(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7152time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7153specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7154
7155Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7156case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7157truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7158
7159The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7160being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7161future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7162recommended now will continue to work then.
7163
7164See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7165details.
7166
7167** There are some additional major modes:
7168
7169dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7170m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7171meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7172
7173** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7174copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7175into Emacs.
7176
7177** New Lisp packages include:
7178
7179*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7180
7181*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7182be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7183
7184*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7185
7186*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7187in shell buffers.
7188
7189*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7190See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7191and `elint-defun'.
7192
7193*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7194meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7195ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7196strings or comments.
7197
7198These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7199abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7200you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7201insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7202at these points.
7203
7204*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7205can visit them by short forms of their names.
7206
7207*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7208Emacs Lisp function at point.
7209
7210*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7211
7212*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7213switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7214
7215*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7216
7217*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7218
7219*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7220
7221*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7222from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7223
7224*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7225You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7226inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7227original place after inserting the copy.
7228
7229*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7230on the buffer.
7231
7232You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7233velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7234(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7235
7236Enable mouse-drag with:
7237 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7238-or-
7239 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7240
7241*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7242mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7243
7244*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7245It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7246
7247*** ogonek
7248
7249The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7250Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7251platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7252TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7253ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7254prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7255instance) and vice versa.
7256
7257To use this package load it using
7258 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7259Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7260 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7261 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7262The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7263ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7264
7265*** Interface to ph.
7266
7267Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7268
7269The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7270services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7271these servers.
7272
7273*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7274
7275*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7276You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7277while the real cursor does not move.
7278
7279*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7280for visiting your favorite web sites.
7281
7282*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7283so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7284
7285** movemail change
7286
7287Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7288mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7289supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7290user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7291
7292This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7293\f
7294* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7295
7296** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7297
7298Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7299end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7300Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7301file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7302file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7303
7304To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7305C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7306coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7307specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7308LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7309save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7310\f
7311* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7312
7313** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7314Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7315vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7316Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7317
7318** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7319to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7320
7321In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7322don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7323"win".
7324
7325** Basic Lisp changes
7326
7327*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7328evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7329
7330*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7331be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7332or by the user.
7333
7334The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7335
7336*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7337
7338(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7339(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7340
7341*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7342usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7343its argument.
7344
7345*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7346
7347*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7348
7349*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7350
7351*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7352error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7353include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7354`format' function.
7355
7356*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7357or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7358whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7359
7360*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7361either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7362adding one of these suffixes.
7363
7364*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7365which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7366If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7367
7368We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7369because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7370
7371*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7372
7373*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7374You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7375
7376*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7377conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7378
7379 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7380
7381BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7382BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7383
7384*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7385choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7386restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7387works using `save-current-buffer'.
7388
7389*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7390write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7391of the last form.
7392
7393*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7394which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7395last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7396as the last form.
7397
7398*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7399characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7400matches.
7401
7402For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7403
7404*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7405with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7406Then it returns that string.
7407
7408For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7409
7410(with-output-to-string
7411 (princ "The buffer is ")
7412 (princ (buffer-name)))
7413
7414returns "The buffer is foo".
7415
7416** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7417is non-nil.
7418
7419These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7420buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7421characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7422
7423*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7424a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7425
7426Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7427character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7428Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7429position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7430characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7431 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7432
7433ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7434Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7435non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7436characters".
7437
7438The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7439through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7440"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7441range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7442leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7443
7444*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7445(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7446multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7447character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7448
7449This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7450always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7451
7452However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7453
7454*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7455because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7456have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7457the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7458guaranteed.
7459
7460*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7461between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7462character).
7463
7464When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7465
7466 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7467 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7468 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7469 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7470 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7471
7472*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7473
7474*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7475`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7476more than the number of characters.
7477
7478You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7479it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7480\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7481is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7482follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7483newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7484
7485*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7486and returns a string containing those characters.
7487
7488*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7489(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7490counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7491character, sref signals an error.
7492
7493*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7494in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7495string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7496
7497*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7498in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7499region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7500
7501*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7502the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7503to a vector of the characters in it.
7504
7505*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7506of a string. You call it as follows:
7507
7508 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7509
7510This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7511STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7512This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7513Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7514it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7515
7516*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7517if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7518
7519*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7520if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7521
7522*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7523to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7524not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7525which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7526
7527(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7528
7529This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7530
7531The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7532If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7533are not included in the resulting value.
7534
7535The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7536at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7537WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7538is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7539
7540If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7541place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7542character extends across that column), then the padding character
7543PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7544string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7545column START-COLUMN.
7546
7547*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7548the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7549necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7550difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7551changed text, before the change.
7552
7553*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7554sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7555one character set for each script, not for each language.
7556
7557**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7558
7559**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7560
7561**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7562set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7563
7564**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7565name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7566which identify the character within that character set.
7567
7568**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7569byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7570opposite of split-char.
7571
7572**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7573of all the characters between BEG and END.
7574
7575**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7576of all the characters in a string.
7577
7578*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7579and specifying coding systems.
7580
7581**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7582system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7583of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7584(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7585and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7586as what to do about code conversion.)
7587
7588**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7589name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7590
7591**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7592for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7593except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7594
7595Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7596which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7597to match against a file name.
7598
7599VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7600a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7601decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7602to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7603systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7604specifies the coding system for encoding.
7605
7606If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7607or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7608
7609**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7610the coding system to use for network sockets.
7611
7612Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7613which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7614either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7615service names.
7616
7617VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7618a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7619decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7620to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7621systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7622specifies the coding system for encoding.
7623
7624If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7625or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7626
7627**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7628for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7629except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7630start the subprocess.
7631
7632**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7633systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7634when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7635(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7636to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7637
7638**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7639coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7640subprocess.
7641
7642It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7643but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7644start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7645connection permanently or until overridden.
7646
7647The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7648file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7649network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7650coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7651It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7652system for one operation at a time.
7653
7654**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7655files, subprocesses or network connections.
7656
7657**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7658coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7659The value is a cons cell,
7660 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7661where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7662the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7663input to the subprocess.
7664
7665**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7666change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7667
7668** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7669customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7670you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7671
7672You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7673variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7674information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7675legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7676customization.
7677
7678Thus, instead of writing
7679
7680 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7681 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7682
7683you would now write this:
7684
7685 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7686 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7687 :type 'boolean
7688 :group foo)
7689
7690The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7691two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7692describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7693for a description of them.
7694
7695The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7696should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7697
7698 (defgroup ispell nil
7699 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7700 :group 'processes)
7701
7702The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7703group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7704but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7705to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7706second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7707
7708Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7709package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7710have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7711package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7712first-level subgroups.
7713
7714** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7715
7716This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7717separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7718
7719** easy-mmode
7720
7721The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7722developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7723only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7724predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7725`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7726`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7727
7728** Text property changes
7729
7730*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7731text property.
7732
7733*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7734previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7735place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7736functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7737starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7738
7739If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7740LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7741of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7742position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7743
7744*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7745value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7746is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7747
7748** Changes in invisibility features
7749
7750*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7751hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7752is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7753should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7754would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7755make the overlay visible.
7756
7757During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7758invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7759needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7760which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7761the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7762t when it should hide it.
7763
7764*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7765
7766Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7767invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7768and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7769Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7770manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7771Here is an example of how to do this:
7772
7773 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7774 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7775 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7776 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7777
7778 ...
7779 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7780
7781 ...
7782 ;; When done with the overlays:
7783 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7784 ;; Or respectively:
7785 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7786
7787** Changes in syntax parsing.
7788
7789*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7790`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7791obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7792`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7793
7794If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7795is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7796used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7797
7798When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7799character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7800
7801 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7802 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7803
7804 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7805 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7806 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7807
7808 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7809 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7810 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7811 determine the syntax type of the character.
7812
7813 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7814 of the current buffer.
7815
7816*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7817value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7818for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7819
7820*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7821and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7822only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7823character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7824another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7825
7826These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7827text property.
7828
7829*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7830arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7831of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7832
7833*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7834(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7835element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7836nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7837string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7838
7839*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7840syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7841`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7842
7843** Changes in face features
7844
7845*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7846if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7847
7848*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7849of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7850
7851*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7852set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7853
7854*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7855set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7856
7857*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7858by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7859and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7860the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7861overlay property).
7862
7863This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7864arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7865
7866** Changes in file-handling functions
7867
7868*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7869directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7870they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7871is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7872
7873This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7874begins with ~.
7875
7876*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7877it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7878
7879*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7880the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7881
7882*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7883as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7884
7885*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7886character code conversion as well as other things.
7887
7888Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7889(formerly it did not).
7890
7891*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7892environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7893
7894*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7895instead of constant strings.
7896
7897*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7898to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7899any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7900
7901substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7902in the same way as before.
7903
7904*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7905The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7906which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7907
7908*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7909error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7910else, and returns nil.
7911
7912*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7913directory cannot be listed.
7914
7915** Changes in minibuffer input
7916
7917*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7918read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7919additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7920argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7921ways:
7922
7923 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7924 It is available through the history command M-n.
7925
7926*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7927read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7928argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7929minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7930enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7931
7932In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7933argument in this way.
7934
7935*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7936from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7937minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7938
7939** Echo area features
7940
7941*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7942echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7943minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7944after the echo area is cleared.
7945
7946*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7947in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7948
7949** Keyboard input features
7950
7951*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7952set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7953
7954*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7955received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7956by keyboard macros.
7957
7958** Frame-related changes
7959
7960*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7961creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7962hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7963
7964*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7965the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7966has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7967
7968*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7969selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7970value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7971in the selected frame.
7972
7973*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7974is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7975which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7976
7977** X Windows features
7978
7979*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7980x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7981x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7982
7983*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7984The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7985
7986*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7987MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7988A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7989
7990If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7991it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7992
7993** Subprocess features
7994
7995*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7996functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7997automatically.
7998
7999*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8000and returns the output from the command as a string.
8001
8002*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8003and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8004
8005** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8006does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8007
8008** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8009at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8010goes after the other menu items.
8011
8012** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8013of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8014around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8015are in use.
8016
8017The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8018series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8019
8020Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8021after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8022form.
8023
8024** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8025is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8026but its hook is still run.
8027
8028** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8029for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8030
8031If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8032regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8033useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8034
8035This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8036are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8037filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8038warned.
8039
8040** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8041way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8042
8043** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8044integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8045functions like display-time.
8046
8047** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8048name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8049
8050** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8051can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8052is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8053
8054** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8055if there is an error in compilation.
8056
8057** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8058switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8059argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8060they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8061
8062** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8063Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8064the *scratch* buffer.
8065
8066** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8067The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8068where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8069e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8070
8071** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8072and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8073It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8074
8075** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8076using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8077variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8078and compose-mail-other-frame.
8079
8080** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8081can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8082full name of the specified user will be returned.
8083
8084** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8085of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8086where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8087in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8088option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8089files at all.
8090
8091** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8092and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8093width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8094the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8095
8096For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8097minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8098with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8099is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8100
8101** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8102
8103** imenu.el changes.
8104
8105You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8106item from menu created by imenu.
8107
8108An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8109#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8110select one of those items.
8111\f
8112* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8113\f
8114* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8115
8116** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8117mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8118
8119** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8120use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8121Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8122\f
8123* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8124
8125** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8126To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8127
8128** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8129conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8130matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8131expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8132word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8133all caps.
8134
8135** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8136at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8137
8138When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8139does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8140as in previous Emacs versions.
8141
8142** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8143non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8144time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8145frames.
8146
8147** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8148if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8149This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8150Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8151accident.
8152
8153** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8154keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8155It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8156line and then executing the macro.
8157
8158This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8159
8160** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8161(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8162characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8163characters.
8164
8165** Font Lock mode
8166
8167*** Font Lock support modes
8168
8169Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8170below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8171hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8172to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8173Font Lock mode is enabled.
8174
8175For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8176
8177 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8178
8179in your ~/.emacs.
8180
8181*** lazy-lock
8182
8183The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8184only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8185becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8186Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8187occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8188buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8189Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8190
8191To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8192
8193 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8194
8195To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8196
8197** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8198
8199*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8200paren and key.
8201
8202*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8203supported.
8204
8205** Gnus changes.
8206
8207Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8208commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8209significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8210previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8211
8212Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8213between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8214
8215*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8216variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8217obsolete.
8218
8219*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8220missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8221
8222 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8223
8224*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8225
8226 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8227
8228*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8229referred.
8230
8231*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8232
8233 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8234
8235*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8236
8237 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8238
8239*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8240buffers.
8241
8242 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8243
8244*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8245
8246 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8247
8248*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8249
8250 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8251
8252*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8253
8254 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8255
8256*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8257is possible.
8258
8259 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8260
8261*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8262groups of groups.
8263
8264*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8265
8266*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8267batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8268
8269*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8270
8271*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8272
8273*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8274
8275 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8276
8277*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8278expiration times.
8279
8280*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8281
8282*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8283process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8284
8285*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8286articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8287bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8288
8289*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8290articles with the `*' command.
8291
8292*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8293
8294*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8295
8296 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8297
8298*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8299
8300*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8301`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8302
8303*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8304buffer.
8305
8306*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8307
8308*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8309
8310*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8311
8312 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8313
8314*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8315
8316 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8317
8318*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8319
8320*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8321
8322*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8323
8324 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8325 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8326
8327*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8328refetching.
8329
8330 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8331
8332*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8333buffer to allow easier treatment.
8334
8335*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8336
8337*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8338
8339 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8340
8341*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8342articles.
8343
8344 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8345
8346*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8347
8348*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8349cited text to hide is now customizable.
8350
8351 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8352
8353*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8354
8355 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8356
8357*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8358
8359*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8360
8361The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8362in greater detail.
8363\f
8364* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8365
8366** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8367second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8368asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8369exists.
8370
8371** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8372as well as lists.
8373
8374** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8375of a given keymap.
8376
8377** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8378given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8379keymap or nil.
8380
8381** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8382an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8383name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8384menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8385equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8386alias.
8387\f
8388* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8389
8390** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8391
8392Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8393This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8394was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8395far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8396pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8397
8398For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8399you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8400`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8401
8402** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8403
8404The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8405do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8406It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8407much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8408chapter of the manual for details.
8409
8410However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8411customization variables take effect.
8412
8413** Marking with the mouse.
8414
8415When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8416highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8417using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8418
8419** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8420
8421*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8422
8423*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8424to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8425
8426*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8427in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8428you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8429application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8430applications, these problems are significant.
8431
8432If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8433likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8434However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8435will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8436other DOS application as a subprocess.
8437
8438Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8439You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8440
8441If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8442subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8443have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8444Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8445separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8446Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8447
8448** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8449
8450This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8451which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8452minibuffer contains.
8453
8454** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8455
8456The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8457It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8458It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8459affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8460
8461The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8462it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8463and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8464when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8465
8466** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8467enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8468
8469** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8470F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8471Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8472
8473If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8474menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8475something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8476the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8477
8478 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8479
8480** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8481to replace the characters it "deletes".
8482
8483** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8484
8485** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8486a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8487select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8488It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8489immediately after the selected one.
8490
8491This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8492made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8493
8494** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8495
8496Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8497directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8498If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8499Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8500recover-session.
8501
8502You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8503auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8504will not work.
8505
8506Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8507normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8508this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8509bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8510now that the bug is fixed.
8511
8512** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8513
8514There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8515when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8516Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8517which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8518
8519If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8520telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8521VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8522the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8523
8524** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8525Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8526is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8527
8528There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8529Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8530enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8531The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8532remain normal.
8533
8534** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8535header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8536
8537Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8538known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8539offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8540Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8541
8542Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8543of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8544a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8545name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8546documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8547`mail-directory-stream'.)
8548
8549** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8550skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8551characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8552with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8553
8554Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8555- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8556wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8557
8558The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8559less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8560headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8561Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8562Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8563fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8564to a limitation in font-lock).
8565
8566External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8567
8568** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8569buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8570buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8571this example:
8572
8573 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8574 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8575
8576** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8577
8578*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8579
8580*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8581
8582*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8583
8584*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8585entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8586will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8587isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8588(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8589The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8590
8591*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8592does the same job.
8593
8594*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8595"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8596
8597*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8598text.
8599
8600** Font Lock mode
8601
8602*** Global Font Lock mode
8603
8604Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8605new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8606font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8607turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8608on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8609
8610For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8611
8612 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8613
8614in your ~/.emacs.
8615
8616*** Local Refontification
8617
8618In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8619However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8620those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8621command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8622
8623In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8624(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8625current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8626above and below point.
8627
8628With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8629
8630** Follow mode
8631
8632Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8633buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8634side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8635they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8636split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8637follow-mode.
8638
8639M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8640
8641To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8642command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8643
8644** hide-show changes.
8645
8646The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8647to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8648normal hooks.
8649
8650** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8651The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8652
8653** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8654recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8655those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8656
8657** MSDOS Changes
8658
8659*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8660Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8661
8662*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8663and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8664
8665*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8666
8667*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8668pressing both mouse buttons.
8669
8670*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8671restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8672are:
8673
8674**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8675now works.
8676
8677**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8678
8679**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8680implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8681
8682**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8683
8684**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8685
8686**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8687
8688**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8689
8690**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8691\f
8692* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8693
8694** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8695tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8696remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8697this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8698behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8699
8700** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8701
8702The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8703not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8704need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8705be different.
8706
8707It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8708than `system-type'.
8709
8710See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8711
8712** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8713now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8714
8715** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8716that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8717
8718** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8719no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8720reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8721
8722The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8723to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8724like this:
8725
8726 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8727
8728SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8729It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8730becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8731
8732REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8733seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8734means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8735
8736*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8737up if too much time passes.
8738
8739 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8740
8741This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8742If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8743of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8744form in BODY.
8745
8746*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8747a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8748call looks like this:
8749
8750 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8751
8752SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8753runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8754timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8755ARGS.
8756
8757Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8758command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8759command.
8760
8761REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8762time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8763does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8764each time Emacs becomes idle.
8765
8766If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8767idle for SECS seconds.
8768
8769*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8770all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8771programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8772instead.
8773
8774*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8775there is no answer within a certain time.
8776
8777 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8778
8779asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8780within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8781Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8782
8783** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8784arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8785meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8786arguments in between are ignored.
8787
8788This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8789the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8790
8791** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8792/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8793/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8794site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8795version.
8796
8797It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8798version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8799for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8800has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8801and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8802problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8803
8804** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8805.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8806systems with limited file name syntax.
8807
8808Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8809convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8810for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8811completions.el:
8812
8813(defvar save-completions-file-name
8814 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8815 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8816
8817This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8818depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8819convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8820Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8821MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8822
8823** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8824rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8825minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8826
8827** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8828marker from its buffer position.
8829
8830** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8831Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8832The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8833
8834** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8835that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8836condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8837of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8838matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8839regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8840
8841This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8842errors that happen often during editing.
8843
8844** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8845into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8846puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8847
8848** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8849now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8850
8851** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8852a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8853name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8854to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8855and not get-buffer-window.
8856
8857** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8858calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8859being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8860
8861If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8862buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8863property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8864non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8865are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8866property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8867over and over for the same text.
8868
8869** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8870
8871*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8872in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8873
8874;; @(#) HEADER: text
8875;; $HEADER: text $
8876
8877in addition to the normal
8878
8879;; HEADER: text
8880
8881*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8882checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8883lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8884
8885
a933dad1 8886\f
3787e12e 8887* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8888
8889----------------------------------------------------------------------
8890Copyright information:
8891
424d8b44 8892Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8893
8894 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8895 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8896 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8897 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8898
8899 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8900 of this document, or of portions of it,
8901 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8902 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8903\f
8904Local variables:
8905mode: outline
8906paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8907end: